JP6999310B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, a game called a pachislot machine equipped with a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols on each surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "start operation") after the game medium such as medals and coins has been inserted into the game machine, and all reels are rotated. Outputs a signal requesting a start. The stop switch detects that the stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation"), and outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of the corresponding reel. do. The stepping motor transfers its driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

In this type of gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as "internal lottery process") is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as "internal winning combination") is performed. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and the combination of symbols (display combination) related to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the combination of the symbols. In this way, when the combination of symbols related to the establishment of the prize is displayed, the privilege is given to the player, so that the movable character has a dynamic movement as an effect to give expectations to the result of the internal lottery process. There has been proposed a game machine front capable of performing the above (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-042693

However, in a gaming machine in which a movable accessory is operated, for example, as in Patent Document 1, it is required to smoothly stop the movable accessory at an appropriate position so as not to cause a displacement of the movable accessory.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly stopping a movable accessory at an appropriate position.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A movable member that can be driven in a predetermined manner (for example, a prism screen 710) and
A drive mechanism capable of driving the movable member (for example, a drive mechanism 815) and
Drive data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge board 86) for storing a plurality of drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20) having different drive modes for driving the movable member, and
A drive mode determining means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes screen accessory sequence processing) that drives the movable member and determines one of the plurality of drive data.
A drive control means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes a screen accessory control task) capable of executing control of the drive mechanism based on the drive data determined by the drive mode determining means.
A stop request generating means for generating a stop request for stopping the drive of the drive mechanism based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a stop request generating means.
When the stop request is generated during the execution of the control of the drive mechanism based on the specific drive data (motor sequence table MT15) among the plurality of drive data and the drive data change condition is satisfied (for example, the loop counter is No. 1). , No3, No4), the specific drive data can be changed to other drive data among the plurality of drive data based on the timing at which the stop request is generated (data control means). For example, the sub CPU 151) that executes the screen operation canceling process and
Equipped with
The drive control means is
It is possible to execute control of the drive mechanism based on the drive data and stop the movable member in an appropriate stop pattern .
The data control means is
Even if the stop request occurs during the execution of control of the drive mechanism based on the specific drive data, the movable member can be smoothly stopped at the proper stop pattern (for example, the projection surface at a proper position). When it can be stopped by the stop pattern) , the specific drive data can be maintained without changing to other drive data, while the specific drive data can be maintained.
The stop request is generated during the execution of control of the drive mechanism based on the specific drive data, and the movable member can be smoothly stopped in the proper stop pattern (for example, the projection surface at a proper position). If it cannot be stopped by the pattern) , the specific drive data can be changed to another drive data, and the movable member can be smoothly stopped at the proper stop pattern (for example, the projection surface at a proper position). It is characterized by being able to stop with a stop pattern) .

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, control of the drive mechanism based on specific drive data (for example, motor sequence table MT15) among a plurality of drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT19) is being executed. Even so, when a stop request for stopping the drive of the drive mechanism (for example, the drive mechanism 815) is generated and the drive data change condition is satisfied (for example, when the loop counter is any of No1, No3, and No4). The specific drive data is changed to other data based on the timing when the stop request is generated. As a result, the movable member can be reliably stopped without causing a positional deviation or the like.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly stopping a movable accessory at an appropriate position.

It is a figure for demonstrating the functional flow of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance structure of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the display device in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the projection block in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a vertical sectional view of the projection block in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the projected block in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the projected member moving mechanism in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the projected block when the trapezoidal member is the projection target of the image light in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the state of the projected block when the pseudo reel member is the projection target of the image light in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a vertical sectional view of the projected block when the pseudo reel member is the projection target of the image light in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the state of the projected block when the plane screen member is the projection target of the image light in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a vertical sectional view of the projected block when the plane screen member is the projection target of the image light in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the circuit provided in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the main control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the microprocessor in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the auxiliary control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is external perspective view of the display device which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the projected block. It is an exploded perspective view of the projected block shown in FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the projected block shown in FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the projected block shown in FIG. It is an external perspective view of a movable screen unit. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the movable screen unit into a prism screen, a right base, a left base, and a rotary gear mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a prism screen. It is an exploded perspective view of a prism screen. It is a perspective view of the prism screen seen from the direction which can visually recognize the mode in which a male rib is sandwiched between female ribs. It is a side view which looked at the prism screen from the right side. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the 1st screen member and the 2nd screen member. FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional perspective view taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 29. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the 1st screen member and the 3rd screen member. It is an exploded perspective view of the right screen drive base and the drive mechanism. It is a perspective view which looked at the movable screen unit from the right side. It is sectional drawing seen from above when the projected block was cut in the horizontal direction so as to include the axis of rotation. It is a perspective view which looked at the right side surface of the projected block from the front side. It is a figure which shows the state which the rotation of a movable screen unit is not blocked by a stopper mechanism. It is a figure which shows the state which the rotation of a movable screen unit is blocked by a stopper mechanism. It is an enlarged view of the part A shown in FIG. 38. It is a perspective view which looked at the movable screen unit from the right side, and is the figure which showed the optical sensor unit so that it could be visually recognized. It is the figure which arranged the front view and the right side view of the projected block side by side. It is the figure which arranged the front view and the right side view of the projected block side by side. It is the figure which arranged the front view and the right side view of the projected block side by side, and is the figure when the projection plane of the 2nd screen member faces the front. (A) is a diagram showing an image example projected on the projection surface of the second screen member, and (B) is a diagram showing an image example projected on the projection surface of the third screen member. It is a front view of the front panel of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a perspective view which looked at the front panel from the upper right side. It is a front view of the front production unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the front effect unit. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 45. It is an exploded perspective view of the right light effect unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the right light effect unit. It is a front view of the right side light production unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a light guide plate, a light guide plate cover, and an LED substrate. It is an exploded perspective view of the LED board, a light guide plate cover, and a light guide plate. FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the LED board and the right light guide plate subunit are assembled. It is a perspective view of the right side light effect unit seen from the arrow view 990 direction of FIG. 55. It is a front view of the left side light production unit. FIG. 58 is a sectional view taken along line DD of FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of a light guide plate, a light guide plate cover, and an LED substrate. It is a figure which shows the mode of the right-hand light effect unit when neither the right-hand light guide plate subunit nor the right-side lens subunit is performing a light emission effect. It is a figure which shows the mode of the right-hand light effect unit when the light-emitting effect is performed for the right light guide plate subunit, and the light-emitting effect is not performed for the right lens subunit. It is a figure which shows the mode of the right-hand light effect unit when the light-emitting effect is not performed on the right light guide plate subunit, and the light-emitting effect is performed on the right lens subunit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main board communication task. It is a figure which shows the contents of a command format. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the effect content determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a screen accessory control task. It is a figure which shows the motor sequence table (MT01-MT06). It is a figure which shows the motor sequence table (MT15). It is a figure which shows the motor sequence table (MT20). It is a figure which shows the solenoid sequence table (ST01 to ST20). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the screen accessory sequence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a screen operation cancellation process. 6 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the on / off timing of the control signal according to the motor sequence table (MT01) and the on / off timing of the control signal according to the solenoid sequence table (ST01). It is a figure which shows the cancellation check table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a focus change process.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and its configuration and operation will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a pachi-slot machine having a bonus operation function and an ART function will be described.

<Functional flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachi-slot machine will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. As the game medium, for example, coins, game balls, point data for games, tokens, and the like can be applied in addition to medals.

When a medal is inserted into a pachislot machine by a player and the start lever is operated, one value (hereinafter referred to as a random number value) is extracted from a random number in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means draws a lot based on the extracted random number values and determines the internal winning combination. This internal lottery means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed along the valid line (winning determination line) described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations are those related to "winning" where benefits such as medal payout, replay operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and other so-called "missing". Such things are provided.

Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R (for example, see FIG. 2), which will be described later, are rotated. After that, when the player presses the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R (see, for example, FIG. 2) corresponding to the predetermined reels, the reel stop control means is based on the internal winning combination and the timing at which the stop button is pressed. Then, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. This reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit 90 (main CPU 101) shown in FIG. 16 for example, which will be described later. That is, the main CPU 101 constitutes a fluctuation control means for controlling the fluctuations of the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the stopped button 17L, which is operated based on the operation of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, A stop control means capable of executing control for stopping the reels 3L, 3C, 3R corresponding to 17C, 17R is configured. In this way, the pachi-slot machine is a gaming machine in which the game progresses by the operation of the player.

In pachislot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec) from the time when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is referred to as "the number of sliding pieces". Then, in the present embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set for four symbols.

When the internal winning combination that allows the combination display of the symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means usually puts the combination of the symbols on the effective line within the specified time of 190 msec (for 4 symbols). Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed as much as possible along the line. Further, the reel stop control means uses a predetermined time to stop the rotation of the reel so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the valid line.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line is related to the winning. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. Then, when it is determined by the winning determination means that the combination of the displayed symbols is related to the winning, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. In pachislot, the above series of flows is performed as one game (unit game).

In addition, in pachislot, in the flow of the above-mentioned series of game operations, various effects are produced by displaying images by a display device, outputting light by various lamps, outputting sounds by speakers, or a combination of these. Is done.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated, a random value for effect is extracted in addition to the random value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the random value for the effect is extracted, the effect content determining means determines the effect to be executed this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination by lottery. This effect content determining means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the sub-control circuit described later.

Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determining means, the effect execution means responds in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reels starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. To execute. In this way, in pachislot, for example, by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination, the opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) is a game. It is provided to the player and can improve the interest of the player.

<Structure of pachislot>
Next, the structure of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes an exterior body 2 (game machine main body). The exterior body 2 has a cabinet 2a for accommodating a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b to which an opening of the cabinet 2a can be opened and closed.

Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R (variable display means, display row) are provided side by side in a horizontal row. Hereinafter, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (main reel) is also referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. A plurality of (for example, 20) patterns are drawn on the surface of the sheet material at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction (rotational direction of the reel). As described above, when the start lever is operated, the plurality of reels are rotated, and the symbols drawn on the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R are displayed in a variable manner. That is, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R as a plurality of symbol rows having symbols in the circumferential direction constitute a variable display device.

The front door 2b includes a door main body 9, a front panel 10, a waist panel 12, and a pedestal portion 13. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable by using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left side end of the door body 9 when viewed from the front side (player side) of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The front panel 10 is provided on the upper part of the door body 9. The front panel 10 is composed of a frame-shaped member having an opening 10a. The opening 10a of the front panel 10 is closed by the display device cover 30, and the display device cover 30 is arranged to face the display device 11 described later arranged inside the cabinet 2a.

The display device cover 30 is formed of a black translucent synthetic resin. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the image (image) displayed by the display device 11 described later through the display device cover 30. Further, in the present embodiment, the display device cover 30 is made of a black translucent synthetic resin to suppress the entry of external light into the cabinet 2a, and the image (image) displayed by the display device 11 is suppressed. Is clearly visible.

The lamp group 21 is provided on the front panel 10. The lamp group 21 includes, for example, the lamps 21a and 21b provided on the upper part of the front panel 10 when viewed from the player side. Each lamp constituting the lamp group 21 is composed of an LED (Light Emitting Diode) or the like (see the LED group 85 in FIG. 15 described later), and lights are turned on and off in a pattern corresponding to the effect content.

The waist panel 12 is provided at a substantially central portion of the door body 9. The waist panel 12 has a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn, and a light source (LED included in the LED group 85 described later) that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel from the back surface side.

The pedestal portion 13 is provided between the front panel 10 and the waist panel 12. The pedestal portion 13 has a symbol display area 4, various devices to be operated by the player (medal insertion slot 14, MAX bet button 15a, 1 bet button 15b, start lever 16, 3 stop buttons 17L, 17C, etc.). 17R, checkout button (not shown), etc.) are provided.

The symbol display area 4 is an area superposed on the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front, and is arranged at a position on the player side of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the three reels. It has a size that makes 3L, 3C, and 3R visible. The symbol display area 4 functions as a display window, and has a configuration in which the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R provided behind the symbol display area 4 can be visually recognized. Hereinafter, the symbol display area 4 is referred to as a reel display window 4.

The reel display window 4 is continuously arranged among a plurality of symbols provided on the peripheral surface of each reel when the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the reel display window 4 is stopped. Two symbols are configured to be displayed within the frame. That is, when the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped, one symbol is provided in each of the upper, middle, and lower regions for each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4 (three in total). ) Is displayed (in the frame of the reel display window 4, the design is displayed in the form of 3 rows × 3 columns). Then, in the present embodiment, in the frame of the reel display window 4, a pseudo line (center line) connecting the middle stage region of the left reel 3L, the middle stage region of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage region of the right reel 3R is provided. It is defined as a valid line that determines whether or not a prize has been won.

The reel display window 4 is formed by an opening of a frame member 31 provided in the pedestal portion 13. Further, a pedestal region having a substantially horizontal plane is provided below the frame member 31 that defines the reel display window 4. When viewed from the player side, the medal insertion slot 14 is provided on the right side of the pedestal area, and the MAX bet button 15a and the 1-bet button 15b are provided on the left side.

The medal slot 14 is provided to receive medals dropped from the outside into the pachi-slot machine 1 by the player. The medals received from the medal slot 14 are used for one game up to a preset predetermined number (for example, 3), and the number of medals exceeding the predetermined number is deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. (So-called credit function (game medium storage means)).

The MAX bet button 15a and the 1-bet button 15b are provided to determine the number of medals deposited in the cabinet 2a to be used for one game. Inside the MAX bet button 15a, a bet button LED (not shown) that lights up when a medal can be inserted is provided. Further, the settlement button is provided to pull out (discharge) the medals deposited inside the pachi-slot machine 1 to the outside.

When the player presses the MAX bet button 15a, medals for the number of bets (3) in the unit game are inserted and the effective line is activated. On the other hand, one medal is inserted each time the 1-bet button 15b is pressed once. When the 1-bet button 15b is operated three times, medals for the number of bets (3) in the unit game are inserted and the effective line is activated. Hereinafter, the operation of the MAX bet button 15a, the operation of the 1-bet button 15b, and the operation of inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 14 (operations of inserting medals to perform a game) are all referred to as "insertion operations".

The start lever 16 is provided to start the rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. That is, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R and provided for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels constitute a plurality of stop operating means. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are also referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

Further, an information display 6 is provided at substantially the center of the pedestal area of the substantially horizontal plane below the reel display window 4. The information display 6 is covered with a transparent window cover (not shown).

The information display 6 is a two-digit 7-segment LED for digitally displaying (notifying) the information of the number of medals to be paid out to the player (hereinafter referred to as "the number of payouts") as a privilege to the player. To digitally display (notify) information such as (hereinafter referred to as "7-segment LED") and the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot 1 (hereinafter referred to as "credit number") to the player. A 2-digit 7-segment LED is provided. In the present embodiment, the 2-digit 7-segment LED for displaying the number of medals to be paid out is a 2-digit 7-segment LED for digitally displaying (notifying) information on the occurrence of an error and the error type to the player. Is also used. Therefore, when an error occurs, the display mode of the 2-digit 7-segment LED for displaying the number of medals to be paid out is switched from the display mode of the number of payouts to the display mode of the information of the error type.

Further, the information display 6 is provided with an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying information on the stop operation necessary for displaying the symbol combination according to the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination along the effective line. ing. The instruction monitor (instruction display) is composed of, for example, a two-digit 7-segment LED. Then, in the instruction monitor, the information of the necessary stop operation is notified to the player by turning on, blinking, or turning off the two-digit 7-segment LED in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified. do.

The mode that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified here is, for example, when the push order "1st (the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L)" is notified. When the numerical value "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor and the push order "2nd (perform the first stop operation on the middle reel 3C)" is displayed, the numerical value "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor and the push order is displayed. When notifying "3rd (performing the first stop operation on the right reel 3R)", the numerical value "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor.

As shown in FIG. 15 described later, the information display 6 is electrically connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the game operation display board 81, and the display operation of the information display 6 is mainly performed. It is controlled by the main control circuit 90 described later in the control board 71. Further, the control method of the various 7-segment LEDs described above is dynamic lighting control.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the instruction monitor controlled by the main control board 71, another means controlled by the sub-control board 72 is used to notify the information of the stop operation. Specifically, the stop operation is performed by the display device 11 described later, which is composed of the projection block 201 including the projector 213 described later and the projected block 202 including various projected members (see FIGS. 3 and 5 to 8 described later). Information of.

When such a configuration is applied, the mode of notification in the instruction monitor and the mode of notification in other means controlled by the sub-control board 72 may be different from each other. That is, in the instruction monitor, the information of the stop operation to be notified may be notified in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation, and it is not always necessary to directly notify the information of the stop operation (for example, the numerical value "1" in the instruction monitor. Even if is displayed, it may not be possible to specify the content of the notification depending on the player, so it cannot be said to be a direct notification). On the other hand, in the notification on the sub side (sub control board side) by other means such as the display device 11 described later, the information of the stop operation may be directly notified. For example, when notifying the push order "1st", the instruction monitor displays a numerical value "1" uniquely corresponding to the push order to be notified, but other means (for example, display device 11 or the like) display the left reel 3L. The instruction information for performing the first stop operation may be directly notified to the user.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 having such a configuration, it is possible to notify the information of the necessary stop operation according to the internal winning combination not only by the control of the sub control board 72 but also by the control of the main control board 71. Further, the presence / absence of notification of such stop operation information may be controlled according to the gaming state. For example, in a general gaming state in which navigation does not occur (for example, a non-ART gaming state, etc.), information on a stop operation is not notified, but in a notification game state in which navigation occurs (for example, an ART gaming state, etc.), information on a stop operation is notified. You may do so.

Further, a sub display device 18 is provided on the left side of the reel display window 4 when viewed from the player side. As shown in FIG. 2, the sub-display device 18 is provided so as to stand substantially perpendicular to the pedestal region of the substantially horizontal plane of the pedestal portion 13 in the front portion of the door body 9. The sub-display device 18 is composed of a liquid crystal display and an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, and displays various information.

Further, a touch sensor 19 is provided on the display surface of the sub display device 18 (see FIG. 15 described later). The touch sensor 19 operates according to a predetermined operating principle such as a capacitance method, and when it receives an operation of a player, it outputs a signal corresponding to the operation as touch input information. The pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a function of enabling the display of the sub-display device 18 to be switched according to the player's operation (touch input information output from the touch sensor 19) received via the touch sensor 19. Has. The sub display device 18 is controlled by the sub control board 72 (see FIG. 15 described later) based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor 19.

At the lower part of the door body 9, a medal payout outlet 24, a medal tray 25, two speaker holes 20L, 20R, and the like are provided. The medal payout outlet 24 guides the medals discharged by driving the medal payout device 51, which will be described later, to the outside. The medal tray 25 stores medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 24. Further, sound effects such as sound effects and music corresponding to the contents of the production are output from the two speaker holes 20L and 20R.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the cabinet 2a, and FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the front door 2b on the back surface side.

As shown in FIG. 3, the cabinet 2a has a top plate 27a, a bottom plate 27b, left and right side plates 27c and 27d, and a back plate 27e. A display device 11 is arranged in the upper part of the cabinet 2a.

The display device 11 has a projection block 201 including the projector 213 described later, and a projected block 202 including a plurality of types of projected members described later on which the image light emitted from the projector 213 described later is projected. Further, in the projected block 202, a function for switching the projected member according to the gaming state (projected member moving mechanism 305 described later) is also provided.

In the display device 11, the image light corresponding to the image data (PJ-compatible image data described later) generated by the image composition process in the virtual space described later is projected onto the predetermined projected member, and the image display effect or the like is performed. Will be. Specifically, the display device 11 generates video light based on the shape of the projected member (object) to be projected and the positional relationship (projection distance, angle, etc.) between the projector 213 and the projected member, which will be described later. Then, the image light is projected onto the surface of the projected member from the projector 213 described later. By providing such an effect function, it is possible to perform an advanced and powerful effect. The specific configuration and operation of the display device 11 will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

A medal payout device 51 (hereinafter referred to as a hopper device), a medal auxiliary storage 52, and a power supply device 53 are arranged in a lower portion of the cabinet 2a.

The hopper device 51 is attached to the central portion of the bottom plate 27b in the cabinet 2a. The hopper device 51 has a structure capable of accommodating a large number of medals and ejecting them one by one. The hopper device 51 pays out medals when, for example, the number of stored medals exceeds 50, or when the settlement button is pressed and the settlement of medals is executed. Then, the medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from the medal payout outlet 24 (see FIG. 2).

The medal auxiliary storage 52 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 51. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is arranged on the right side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. Further, the medal auxiliary storage 52 is detachably attached to the bottom plate 27b of the cabinet 2a.

The power supply device 53 includes a power supply switch 53a and a power supply board 53b (power supply means) (see FIG. 15 described later). The power supply device 53 is arranged on the left side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front, and is attached to the left side plate 27c. The power supply device 53 converts the AC voltage 100V power supplied from the sub power supply device (not shown) into the DC voltage power required in each part, and supplies the converted power to each part.

Further, above the power supply device 53 in the cabinet 2a, a sub-control board case 57 for accommodating the sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 15 described later) is arranged. A sub-control circuit 150 (see FIG. 18 described later) described later is mounted on the sub-control board 72 housed in the sub-control board case 57. The sub-control circuit 150 is a circuit that controls the execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like. The sub-control board 72 shows a specific example of the control unit according to the present invention. The specific configuration of the sub-control circuit 150 will be described later.

The sub-relay board 61 is arranged above the sub-control board case 57 in the cabinet 2a. The sub-relay board 61 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the sub-control board 72 and the main control board 71, which will be described later, is mounted. Further, the sub-relay board 61 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the sub-control board 72 and a board arranged around the sub-control board 72, various device units (units), and the like is mounted.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 3, a cabinet-side relay board 44 (see FIG. 15 described later) is arranged in the cabinet 2a. The cabinet-side relay board 44 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 15 described later), a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75 (see FIG. 15 described later), and a medal payout count switch (not shown). It is a relay board on which the wiring for connecting the above is mounted.

As shown in FIG. 4, a middle door 41 is arranged at the center of the front door 2b on the back surface side, and a reel display window 4 (see FIG. 2) is attached so as to be openable and closable from the back side. Although not shown in FIG. 4, three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are attached to the reel display window 4 side of the middle door 41, and the main control is on the side opposite to the reel display window 4 side of the middle door 41. A main control board case 55 in which the board 71 (see FIG. 15 described later) is housed is attached. A stepping motor (not shown) is connected to the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio.

The main control board 71 housed in the main control board case 55 has a main control circuit 90 (see FIG. 16 described later) described later. The main control circuit 90 (main control means) is a circuit that controls the main flow of the game in the pachi-slot machine 1, such as determination of an internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and determination of presence / absence of winning. .. Further, in the present embodiment, for example, control such as lottery processing for determining whether or not a notification game (ART or the like) is determined, display processing of navigation information on an instruction monitor, transmission processing of various test signals, etc. is also performed by the main control circuit 90. .. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 90 will be described later.

Speakers 65L and 65R are arranged below the middle door 41 on the back surface side of the front door 2b. The speakers 65L and 65R are arranged at positions facing the speaker holes 20L and 20R (see FIG. 2), respectively.

Further, above the speaker 65L, a selector 66 and a door open / close monitoring switch 67 are arranged. The selector 66 is a device for selecting whether or not the material and shape of the medal are appropriate, and guides the appropriate medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 to the hopper device 51. A medal sensor (game medium detecting means: not shown) for detecting that an appropriate medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 66.

The door open / close monitoring switch 67 is arranged diagonally to the lower left of the selector 66 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back surface side. The door open / close monitoring switch 67 outputs a security signal for notifying the open / close of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 4, a door relay terminal plate 68 is arranged on the back surface of the front door 2b, which is a region opened and closed by the middle door 41 and below the reel display window 4 (see the figure below). See 15). The door relay terminal board 68 includes a main control board 71 in the main control board case 55, various buttons and switches, a sub relay board 61, a selector 66, a game operation display board 81, a first interface board 401 for a testing machine, and a test machine. This is a relay board on which wiring for connecting to each of the second interface boards 402 for a testing machine is mounted. Examples of various buttons and switches include a MAX bet button 15a, a 1-bet button 15b, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77 described later, a start switch 79, and the like.

<Display device configuration>
Next, the configuration of the display device 11 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is an external perspective view of the display device 11.

As shown in FIG. 5, the display device 11 includes a projection block 201 and a projected block 202 arranged below the projection block 201. The display device 11 generates image light by a projector 213 installed in the projection block 201, which will be described later, and emits the image light to a projection surface of a projected member (trapezoidal member 302, etc. described later) provided in the projected block 202. Project to.

In this specification, expressions such as "image projected (or projected) from the projector 213", "projected image", "projected image", and "projected image" may be used. However, these all mean that the image is projected (or projected) on the projection surface by the image light projected from the projector 213.

[Projection block]
Next, the configuration of the projection block 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the projection block 201. FIG. 7 is a vertical sectional view of the projection block 201. The projection block 201 including the projector 213 described later shows a specific example of the projection unit according to the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 6, the projection block 201 has a base member 211, a reflection member 212, and a projector 213. The base member 211 is composed of a hollow substantially box-shaped member having an open lower surface, and includes an upper plate portion 221, a front plate portion 222, a rear plate portion 223, a left plate portion 224, and a right plate portion 225. Have.

A projector 213 is attached to the back surface of the upper plate portion 221 (the surface on the projected block 202 side). Further, the front plate portion 222 is provided with a reflective member mounting portion 227, and the reflective member mounting portion 227 is composed of a protruding member protruding forward (on the player side) from the front plate portion 222.

The front piece 234 of the reflective member mounting portion 227 is composed of a plate-shaped member, and the surface direction of the front surface (protruding surface of the reflective member mounting portion 227) of the front piece 234 is diagonally upward and the surface direction of the back surface is diagonally downward. It is tilted so that it becomes. A reflective member 212 is attached to the back surface of the front piece 234 (the surface on the side of the projector 213 and the projected block 202).

As shown in FIG. 7, the reflective member 212 is fixed to the mirror holder 236 and the mirror holder 236, which are formed of a plate-shaped member having substantially the same size (size) as the front piece 234 and having a rectangular surface. It has a reflection mirror 237 and the like. The mirror holder 236 is fixed to the back surface of the front piece 234 by using a fixing member such as a screw.

The reflection mirror 237 is fixed to the surface of the mirror holder 236 on the projector 213 side and the projected block 202 side. The reflection mirror 237 is tilted so that the surface direction of the reflection surface is diagonally downward, and the image light emitted from the projector 213 is directed toward the projected member (trapezoidal member 302 or the like described later) of the projected block 202. reflect.

As shown in FIG. 7, the projector 213 has a projector main body 241 and a mounting bracket 242. The mounting bracket 242 is composed of a plate-shaped member having a substantially rectangular surface, and the projector main body 241 is mounted on the back surface (the surface on the projected block 202 side) of the mounting bracket 242. The mounting bracket 242 is fixed to the back surface of the upper plate portion 221 of the base member 211 by using a fixing member such as a screw.

The projector main body 241 has a case 251 (see FIG. 6), a lighting unit 252, a liquid crystal prism unit 253, a projection lens 254, a plurality of heat sinks 255, and a plurality of fans 256. Note that FIG. 7 shows only one heat sink 255 and one fan 256.

The case 251 is composed of a hollow housing. A lighting unit 252, a liquid crystal prism unit 253, a projection lens 254, a heat sink 255, and a fan 256 are housed inside the case 251. Further, an opening closed by the projection lens 254 is provided on the front surface (reflection member 212 side) of the case 251.

Inside the case 251 the liquid crystal prism unit 253 is arranged behind the projection lens 254 (in the direction opposite to the mirror holder 236 side), and the lighting unit 252 is arranged behind the liquid crystal prism unit 253. A plurality of heat sinks 255 are arranged around the lighting unit 252, and the plurality of fans 256 are arranged adjacent to the plurality of heat sinks 255.

The lighting unit 252 has, for example, a plurality of light sources. The plurality of light sources are composed of a light source R (not shown) that emits red light, a light source G (not shown) that emits green light, and a light source B (not shown) that emits blue light. .. Therefore, light of three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) is incident on the liquid crystal prism unit 253, respectively.

The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, one high-intensity discharge lamp may be used as the light source. In this case, a color separation mirror (dichroic mirror) is used to separate the light emitted from the high-intensity discharge lamp into three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B).

The liquid crystal prism unit 253 has, for example, three liquid crystal panels and a cross prism (dichroic prism) for color synthesis. The three liquid crystal panels include a liquid crystal panel R (not shown) to which red light is incident, a liquid crystal panel G (not shown) to which green light is incident, and a liquid crystal panel B (not shown) to which blue light is incident. Consists of. The cross prism synthesizes three image lights generated by each liquid crystal panel as one image light.

The projection lens 254 is arranged to face the reflection mirror 237 of the reflection member 212. Therefore, the image light emitted from the liquid crystal prism unit 253 passes through the projection lens 254 and is incident on the reflection mirror 237. The plurality of heat sinks 255 dissipate heat generated by the lighting unit 252. Further, the plurality of fans 256 has a plurality of heat sinks 2.
Air is blown to 55 to cool the plurality of heat sinks 255.

[Projected block]
Next, the configuration of the projected block 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the projected block 202. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the moving mechanism of the projected member provided on the projected block 202.

As shown in FIG. 8, the projected block 202 includes a storage case 301, a trapezoidal member 302, a pseudo reel member 303, a flat screen member 304, and a projected member moving mechanism 305. Each of the trapezoidal member 302, the pseudo reel member 303, and the flat screen member 304 shows a specific example of the display unit according to the present invention. Further, the trapezoidal member 302 shows a specific example of the first display unit according to the present invention, and each of the pseudo reel member 303 and the flat screen member 304 is one of the second display units according to the present invention. A concrete example is shown. Further, the projected member moving mechanism 305 shows a specific example of the movable control means according to the present invention.

(1) Storage Case The storage case 301 is a hollow housing having an open front surface and an upper surface, and has a pedestal portion 311, a back wall 312, a left side wall 313, and a right side wall 314. Each wall is composed of a plate-shaped member having a substantially rectangular surface, the pedestal portion 311 and the back surface wall 312 form the bottom portion and the back surface portion of the storage case 301, respectively, and the left side wall 313 and the right side wall 314, respectively. The left side surface portion and the right side surface portion of the storage case 301 are formed.

(2) Trapezoidal member The trapezoidal member 302 is composed of a floor plate portion 321 having a trapezoidal surface and three wall plate portions 322,323,324, and has a fixing member such as a screw on the pedestal portion 311 of the storage case 301. It is fixed.

The floor plate portion 321 is mounted on the mounting surface 311a of the pedestal portion 311. At this time, the floor plate portion 321 is placed on the pedestal portion 311 so that the lower side (long side) portion of the floor plate portion 321 is located on the front surface (player side). The surface 321a (flat surface) opposite to the surface of the floor plate portion 321 that is in contact with the mounting surface 311a of the pedestal portion 311 is a projection surface. The image light emitted from the projector 213 and then reflected by the reflecting member 212 is projected onto the projection surface 321a of the floor plate portion 321.

The wall plate portion 322 is composed of a plate-shaped member having a substantially rectangular surface, and is continuously formed on the upper side portion of the floor plate portion 321. At this time, the wall plate portion 322 is continuously formed on the upper side portion of the floor plate portion 321 so that the angle between the surface of the wall plate portion 322 and the surface of the floor plate portion 321 is substantially vertical. Then, the plane of the wall plate portion 322 on the front door 2b side (player side) becomes the projection surface 322a. Similar to the projection surface 321a of the floor plate portion 321, the image light emitted from the projector 213 and then reflected by the reflection member 212 is projected onto the projection surface 322a of the wall plate portion 322.

The wall plate portion 323 is composed of a plate-shaped member, and is continuously formed on the left side portion of the floor plate portion 321 and the left side portion of the wall plate portion 322. At this time, the wall plate portion 323 is continuous with the left side portion of the floor plate portion 321 and the left side portion of the wall plate portion 322 so that the angle between the surface of the wall plate portion 323 and the surface of the floor plate portion 321 is substantially vertical. Is formed. Then, the plane of the wall plate portion 323 on the wall plate portion 324 side becomes the projection surface 323a. Since the angle between the projection surface 323a of the wall plate portion 323 and the projection surface 322a of the wall plate portion 322 is an obtuse angle (an angle larger than 90 degrees), the projection surface 323a has an opening 10a of the front door 2b. It becomes visible to the player through. Similar to the projection surface 321a of the floor plate portion 321, the image light emitted from the projector 213 and then reflected by the reflection member 212 is projected onto the projection surface 323a of the wall plate portion 323.

The wall plate portion 324 is composed of a plate-shaped member, and is continuously formed on the right side portion of the floor plate portion 321 and the right side portion of the wall plate portion 322. At this time, the wall plate portion 324 is continuous with the right side portion of the floor plate portion 321 and the right side portion of the wall plate portion 322 so that the angle between the surface of the wall plate portion 324 and the surface of the floor plate portion 321 is substantially vertical. Is formed. Then, the plane of the wall plate portion 324 on the wall plate portion 323 side becomes the projection surface 324a. Since the angle between the projection surface 324a of the wall plate portion 324 and the projection surface 322a of the wall plate portion 322 is an obtuse angle (an angle larger than 90 degrees), the projection surface 324a has an opening 10a of the front door 2b. It becomes visible to the player through. Similar to the projection surface 321a of the floor plate portion 321, the image light emitted from the projector 213 and then reflected by the reflection member 212 is projected onto the projection surface 324a of the wall plate portion 324.

In the present embodiment, the image light is projected onto a part of the projection surface 321a, 322a, 323a, 324a of the trapezoidal member 302. The projection planes 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a have a projection area on which the image light is projected and a non-projection area on which the image light is not projected. A silver (gray) paint is applied to the projection areas of the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a. On the other hand, black paint is applied to the non-projection regions of the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a.

By applying the black paint to the non-projection regions of the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a in this way, it is possible to suppress the reflection of light in the non-projection region and suppress the diffuse reflection of light in the cabinet 2a. can do. Further, by applying the black paint to the non-projected area, vibration, rotation, collapse, shape change, coloring change, partial emphasis expression, etc. of the projected member become possible.

(3) Pseudo-reel member As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the pseudo-reel member 303 includes an arc plate portion 331 and a pair of rotating arms 332A and 332B (for the rotating arm 332B, see FIG. 11 described later). To prepare for.

The arc plate portion 331 is composed of a plate body extending in an arc shape (a plate body having an arc shape extending on the side surface). Therefore, the inner peripheral surface 331a and the outer peripheral surface 331b are formed on the arc plate portion 331. The inner peripheral surface 331a of the arc plate portion 331 is provided with decorations related to the model of the pachi-slot machine 1. On the other hand, the outer peripheral surface 331b is formed of a smooth curved surface, and is a projection surface on which the image light emitted from the projector 213 is projected (see FIG. 11 described later). Further, silver (or gray) paint is applied to the inner peripheral surface 331a and the outer peripheral surface 331b of the arc plate portion 331.

The pair of rotating arms 332A and 332B are continuously formed on the pair of arcuate side surface portions of the arcuate plate portion 331, and the surface thereof is composed of a substantially fan-shaped plate body. The pair of rotating arms 332A and 332B are rotatably supported by the support plates 351A and 351B described later of the projected member moving mechanism 305, respectively. The pseudo reel member 303 rotates between a standby position in which the inner peripheral surface 331a faces forward (player side) and an exposed position in which the outer peripheral surface 331b faces forward. The operation of the pseudo reel member 303 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12 described later.

(4) Flat screen member As shown in FIG. 8, the flat screen member 304 is composed of a plate-shaped member having a substantially rectangular surface, and has a first flat surface 304a (lower surface in FIG. 8) and a second flat surface 304b (FIG. 8). 8 has an upper surface). A silver (or gray) paint is applied to the first flat surface 304a of the flat screen member 304. On the other hand, a white paint is applied to the second plane 304b, and the second plane 304b becomes a projection surface of image light projected from the projector 213 via the reflection member 212.

The flat screen member 304 rotates between a standby position in which the plane direction of the first plane 304a is diagonally downward and an exposed position in which the plane direction of the second plane (projection plane) 304b is forward (player side). do. Then, when the flat screen member 304 is arranged at the exposed position, the image light is projected on the second flat surface (projection surface) 304b.

The flat screen member 304 is supported by a pair of crank arms 378A and 378B described later of the projected member moving mechanism 305, and the flat screen member 304 is rotated by the rotation of the pair of crank arms 378A and 378B. The crank arms 378A and 378B are rotatably supported by the support plates 351A and 351B, respectively.

(5) Projected member moving mechanism As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the projected member moving mechanism 305 includes support plates 351A and 351B, a pseudo reel member moving mechanism 352, and a flat screen member moving mechanism 353. ..

Both the support plates 351A and 351B are formed of a substantially rectangular plate-shaped member having a vertically long surface.
The support plates 351A and 351B are arranged to face each other in the left-right direction (the long side direction of the pseudo reel member 303) with an appropriate distance (a distance larger than the width of the trapezoidal member 302). Further, the support plates 351A and 351B are fixed to the mounting surface 311a of the pedestal portion 311 of the storage case 301 by using a fixing member such as a screw. A pseudo reel member 303 is arranged between the support plate 351A and the support plate 351B.

Further, the support plates 351A and 351B rotatably support the rotating arms 332A and 332B of the pseudo reel member 303, respectively. The support plates 351A and 351B have a through hole through which the shaft 374 described later of the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 penetrates and a through hole through which the rotation shaft 335 of the rotation arms 332A and 332B in the pseudo reel member 303 penetrates. It is provided.

Further, the support plate 351B is provided with a stopper 355, a first sensor 356, and a second sensor 357. The stopper 355 is a member for limiting the rotation range of the drive gear 362 described later of the pseudo reel member moving mechanism 352. The first sensor 356 detects the crank arm 378B described later of the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 when the flat screen member 304 is moved to the standby position. The second sensor 357 detects the crank arm 378B described later of the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 when the flat screen member 304 is moved to the exposed position.

The pseudo reel member moving mechanism 352 has a drive motor 361 and a drive gear 362. The drive motor 361 is fixed to the motor fixing portion 314b of the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301 by using a fixing member such as a screw. At this time, the drive motor 361 is attached to the right side wall 314 so that the rotation shaft (not shown) of the drive motor 361 meshes with the drive gear 362.

The drive gear 362 is composed of a gear member having a substantially semicircular surface, and is rotatably supported by a support plate 351B. The drive gear 362 is arranged on the surface of the support plate 351B facing the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301. Further, a rotation shaft 335 of the rotation arm 332B (see FIG. 11 described later) of the pseudo reel member 303 is connected to the central portion of the drive gear 362.

The flat screen member moving mechanism 353 has a drive motor 371, intermediate gears 372, 373, a shaft 374, crank gears 375, 376, and crank arms 378A, 378B. The drive motor 371 is fixed to the support plate 351B by using a fixing member such as a screw. At this time, the drive motor 371 is attached to the support plate 351B so that the rotary shaft 371a of the drive motor 371 meshes with the intermediate gear 372.

The intermediate gear 372 is arranged between the support plate 351B and the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301. One end of the shaft 374 protruding through the through hole 314a (see FIG. 8) provided in the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301 is connected to the central portion of the intermediate gear 372.

The intermediate gear 373 is arranged between the support plate 351A and the left side wall 313 of the storage case 301. The other end of the shaft 374 that protrudes through the through hole 313a (see FIG. 8) provided in the left side wall 313 of the storage case 301 is connected to the central portion of the intermediate gear 373.

The shaft 374 is provided so as to penetrate the support plates 351A and 351B, and rotatably supports the support plates 351A and 351B. Since the intermediate gear 373 is connected to the intermediate gear 372 via the shaft 374 as described above, the intermediate gear 373 rotates together with the intermediate gear 372.

The crank gear 375 is arranged between the support plate 351B and the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301, and is rotatably supported by the right side wall 314. At this time, the crank gear 375 is arranged so as to mesh with the intermediate gear 372. Further, a crankpin 375a is formed on the surface of the intermediate gear 372 facing the support plate 351B.

The crank gear 376 is arranged between the support plate 351A and the left side wall 313 of the storage case 301, and is rotatably supported by the left side wall 313. At this time, the crank gear 376 is arranged so as to mesh with the intermediate gear 373. Further, a crankpin 376a is formed on the surface of the intermediate gear 373 facing the support plate 351A.

The crank arm 378A is arranged between the support plate 351A and the left side wall 313 of the storage case 301, and is rotatably supported by the support plate 351A. The crank arm 378A has an arm portion 381 composed of a plate-shaped member extending in a substantially L-shape, and a connecting portion 382 provided at one end of the arm portion 381.

The arm portion 381 is provided with a rotation shaft 384 that rotatably engages with the support plate 351A and an engagement groove 385 extending linearly. The engaging groove 385 is provided on the surface of the arm portion 381 facing the left side wall 313 of the storage case 301. The crankpin 376a of the crank gear 376 is slidably engaged with the engagement groove 385.

The connecting portion 382 is composed of a plate-shaped member having a rectangular surface. One surface of the connecting portion 382 is continuous with the arm portion 381, and the other surface (flat surface) is in contact with the first flat surface 304a of the flat screen member 304 (see FIG. 8). The connecting portion 382 is fixed to the first flat surface 304a of the flat screen member 304 by using a fixing member such as a screw.

The crank arm 378B is arranged between the support plate 351B and the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301, and is rotatably supported by the support plate 351B. The crank arm 378B has an arm portion 391 formed of a plate-shaped member extending in a substantially L-shape, and a connecting portion 392 provided at one end of the arm portion 391.

The arm portion 391 includes a rotation shaft (not shown) that rotatably engages with the support plate 351A, a linearly extending engagement groove 395, a first detection piece 396, and a second detection piece 397. Is provided. The engaging groove 395 is provided on the surface of the arm portion 391 facing the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301. The crankpin 375a of the crank gear 375 is slidably engaged with the engagement groove 395.

The first detection piece 396 is provided at a position between the connection portion 392 and the engagement groove 395, and protrudes outward from the side portion of one of the arm portions 391 (the back surface side in FIG. 9). When the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 moves the flat screen member 304 to the standby position, the first detection piece 396 is detected by the first sensor 356 provided on the support plate 351B.

The second detection piece 397 is provided below the first detection piece 396, and projects outward from one side of the arm portion 391. When the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 moves the flat screen member 304 to the exposed position, the second detection piece 397 is detected by the second sensor 357 provided on the support plate 351B.

The connecting portion 392 is composed of a plate-shaped member having a rectangular surface. One surface of the connecting portion 392 is continuous with the arm portion 391, and the other surface (flat surface) is in contact with the first flat surface 304a of the flat screen member 304 (see FIG. 8). The connecting portion 392 is fixed to the first flat surface 304a of the flat screen member 304 by using a fixing member such as a screw.

[Condition when using trapezoidal member]
Next, a state when the trapezoidal member 302 is a projection target of video light will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the projected block 202 when the trapezoidal member 302 is a projection target of video light. Note that FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the projected block 202 when the trapezoidal member 302 is the projection target of the image light.

In a state where the trapezoidal member 302 is a projection target of video light, the pseudo reel member 303 and the flat screen member 304 are arranged at their respective standby positions as shown in FIG.

When the pseudo reel member 303 is arranged in the standby position, the pseudo reel member 303 is located behind the trapezoidal member 302, and the inner peripheral surface 331a of the arc plate portion 331 faces forward. At this time, one radial portion (one radial side portion) of the drive gear 362 comes into contact with the stopper 355 (see FIG. 9). Therefore, when the projected block 202 is viewed from the right side (right side wall 314 side), the rotation of the drive gear 362 clockwise (clockwise) is locked by the stopper 355.

Further, when the flat screen member 304 is arranged at the standby position, the flat screen member 304 is located above the trapezoidal member 302, and the first flat surface 304a faces downward. At this time, the first sensor 356 detects the first detection piece 396 provided on the crank arm 378B of the flat screen member moving mechanism 353. As a result, the sub-control circuit 150 detects that the flat screen member 304 is arranged at the standby position.

The pseudo reel member 303 and the flat screen member 304 (projected member) arranged at the standby position do not intervene between the trapezoidal member 302 and the opening 10a (see FIG. 2) of the front panel 10. Therefore, in this state, the trapezoidal member 302 is exposed to the opening 10a of the front panel 10 when viewed from the player side, and is a projection target of the image light.

Image light incident from the projector 213 of the projection block 201 via the reflection mirror 237 is projected onto the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, 324a (see FIG. 8 for the projection surface 324a) of the trapezoidal member 302 to be projected. Will be done. As a result, the image used for the effect is displayed on each projection surface of the trapezoidal member 302 to be projected, and can be visually recognized by the player.

In the present embodiment, video light is projected onto the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, 324a of the floor plate portion 321 of the trapezoidal member 302 and the three wall plate portions 322,323,324 (see FIG. 8 for the wall plate portion 324). , Display the image used for the production. As a result, it is possible to perform a novel effect that gives a three-dimensional effect and depth to the image with a simple configuration without increasing the cost. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the video display effect.

In the present embodiment, the trapezoidal member 302 applied as the projected member has four projection planes that intersect the optical axis of the projected image light at different angles. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the projected member according to the present invention, for example, a projected member having two or three projection planes intersecting the optical axis of the image light at different angles is used. Alternatively, a projected member having five or more projection planes intersecting the optical axis of the image light at different angles may be used.

Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration example in which the trapezoidal member 302 is fixed at a predetermined position is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the trapezoidal member according to the present invention, for example, a trapezoidal member that can move between a standby position where the image light emitted from the projector is not projected and an exposed position where the image light emitted from the projector is projected may be used. good. Further, in this case, the movement mode of the trapezoidal member may be, for example, a mode of rotating around an appropriate axis or a mode of linear movement.

[Operation of pseudo reel member]
Next, the operation of the pseudo reel member 303 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a state of the projected block 202 when the pseudo reel member 303 is a projection target of video light. FIG. 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the projected block 202 when the pseudo reel member 303 is a projection target of video light.

When the pseudo reel member 303 is targeted for projection of video light, the pseudo reel member 303 is moved from the standby position (state shown in FIG. 10) to the exposed position (state shown in FIGS. 11 and 12). At this time, the flat screen member 304 is maintained in a state of being arranged in the standby position.

In order to move the pseudo reel member 303 to the exposed position, the drive motor 361 of the pseudo reel member moving mechanism 352 is driven, and the projected block 202 is viewed from the right side (right side wall 314 side) on the drawing, and the drive gear 362 is used. Is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) (see the thick arrow in FIG. 11).

Since the rotation shaft 335 provided on the rotation arm 332B of the pseudo reel member 303 is connected to the drive gear 362, when the drive gear 362 is rotated counterclockwise, the pseudo reel member 303 moves to the left from the standby position. Rotate around. Then, when the other radial portion of the drive gear 362 comes into contact with the stopper 355, the counterclockwise rotation of the drive gear 362 is locked by the stopper 355. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the pseudo reel member 303 is arranged at the exposed position.

When the pseudo reel member 303 is arranged at the exposed position, the front surface of the trapezoidal member 302 is covered by the pseudo reel member 303. Further, at this time, the flat screen member 304 arranged at the standby position does not intervene between the pseudo reel member 303 and the opening 10a (see FIG. 2) of the front panel 10. Therefore, in this state, the pseudo reel member 303 is exposed to the opening 10a of the front panel 10 when viewed from the player side, and is a projection target of the image light.

The image light incident from the projector 213 of the projection block 201 via the reflection mirror 237 is projected onto the outer peripheral surface 331b (hereinafter referred to as “projection surface 331b”) of the pseudo reel member 303 that is the projection target. As a result, the image used for the production is displayed on the pseudo reel member 303, which is the projection target, and can be visually recognized by the player.

In order to move the pseudo reel member 303 from the exposed position to the standby position, the drive motor 361 of the pseudo reel member moving mechanism 352 is driven, and the projected block 202 is viewed from the right side on the drawing, and the drive gear 362 is used. Rotates clockwise (clockwise).

When the drive gear 362 rotates clockwise, the pseudo reel member 303 rotates clockwise from the exposed position. Then, when one of the radial portions of the drive gear 362 comes into contact with the stopper 355 (state in FIG. 9), the clockwise rotation of the drive gear 362 is locked by the stopper 355. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10, the pseudo reel member 303 is arranged at the standby position.

In the present embodiment, the image light representing the reel is projected on the curved projection surface 331b of the pseudo reel member 303. This makes it appear that the reel is physically present in the cabinet 2a facing the opening 10a of the front panel 10 (front door 2b). As a result, it is possible to perform a novel effect that gives a three-dimensional effect and depth to the image with a simple configuration without increasing the cost, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect of displaying the image.

[Operation of flat screen member]
Next, the operation of the flat screen member 304 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a state of the projected block 202 when the flat screen member 304 is a projection target of video light. FIG. 14 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the projected block 202 when the flat screen member 304 is the projection target of the image light.

When the flat screen member 304 is targeted for projection of image light, the flat screen member 304 is moved from the standby position (state shown in FIG. 10) to the exposed position (state shown in FIGS. 13 and 14). At this time, the pseudo reel member 303 is maintained in a state of being arranged in the standby position.

To move the flat screen member 304 to the exposed position, drive the drive motor 371 of the flat screen member moving mechanism 353, and see the projected block 202 from the right side (right side wall 314 side) on the drawing, and the intermediate gear 372. Rotates clockwise (clockwise) (see the thick arrow in FIG. 13).

One end of the shaft 374 is connected to the intermediate gear 372, and the intermediate gear 373 (see FIG. 9) is connected to the other end of the shaft 374. Therefore, when the projected block 202 is viewed from the right side on the drawing and the intermediate gear 372 rotates clockwise, the intermediate gear 373 also rotates clockwise.

When the intermediate gears 372 and 373 rotate clockwise, the crank gears 375 and 376 (see FIG. 9) rotate counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when the projected block 202 is viewed from the right side on the drawing. Further, the crank pin 375a of the crank gear 375 is engaged with the engagement groove 395 of the crank arm 378B, and the crank pin 376a of the crank gear 376 is engaged with the engagement groove 385 of the crank arm 378A.

Therefore, when the crank gears 375 and 376 (see FIG. 9) rotate counterclockwise, the crank pins 375a and 376 press the crank arms 378A and 378B to rotate counterclockwise (counterclockwise), respectively. As a result, when the projected block 202 is viewed from the right side on the drawing, the flat screen member 304 connected to the crank arms 378A and 378B rotates counterclockwise from the standby position.

Then, when the second sensor 357 detects the second detection piece 397 of the crank arm 378B, the drive of the drive motor 371 is stopped and the rotation of the flat screen member 304 is stopped. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the flat screen member 304 is arranged at the exposed position.

When the flat screen member 304 is arranged at the exposed position, the front surface of the trapezoidal member 302 is covered by the flat screen member 304. Further, at this time, the pseudo reel member 303 arranged at the standby position does not intervene between the flat screen member 304 and the opening 10a (see FIG. 2) of the front panel 10. Therefore, in this state, the flat screen member 304 is exposed to the opening 10a of the front panel 10 when viewed from the player side, and is a projection target.

The image light incident from the projector 213 of the projection block 201 via the reflection mirror 237 is projected onto the projection surface 304b of the flat screen member 304 that is the projection target. As a result, the image used for the effect is displayed on the flat screen member 304 which is the projection target, and can be visually recognized by the player. For example, by projecting an image light representing a two-dimensional image on a projection surface 304b which is a plane of a flat screen member 304, the same as when displaying an image on a display device using a flat panel such as a liquid crystal display device. The image can be shown to the player.

In order to move the flat screen member 304 from the exposed position to the standby position, the drive motor 371 of the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 is driven, and the projected block 202 is viewed from the right side on the drawing, and the intermediate gear 372. Rotate the 373 counterclockwise (counterclockwise).

When the intermediate gears 372 and 373 rotate counterclockwise, the crank gears 375 and 376 (see FIG. 9) rotate clockwise when the projected block 202 is viewed from the right side on the drawing. Then, when the crank gears 375 and 376 rotate clockwise, the crank pins 375a and 376 press the crank arms 378A and 378B to rotate clockwise, respectively. As a result, when the projected block 202 is viewed from the right side on the drawing, the flat screen member 304 connected to the crank arms 378A and 378B rotates clockwise from the exposed position.

After that, when the first sensor 356 detects the first detection piece 396 of the crank arm 378B, the drive of the drive motor 371 is stopped and the rotation of the flat screen member 304 is stopped. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10, the flat screen member 304 is arranged in the standby position.

In this embodiment, as described above, the white paint is applied to the projection surface 304b of the flat screen member 304. Then, an image light representing a two-dimensional image is projected on the projection surface 304b of the flat screen member 304. White and silver (gray) have at least a constant reflectance of visible light, and white has a higher reflectance of light than silver. Therefore, the two-dimensional image projected on the white projection surface 304b can be made easier to see than, for example, the two-dimensional image projected on the projection surface 304b coated with the silver paint.

On the other hand, the projection surface 321a, 322a, 323a, 324a of the trapezoidal member 302 and the projection surface 331b of the pseudo reel member 303 are coated with silver (gray) paint. Therefore, on the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, 324a of the trapezoidal member 302 and the projection surface 331b of the pseudo reel member 303, a three-dimensional image can be obtained more than when white paint is applied to these projection surfaces. It can be made to look three-dimensional.

<Control system provided by pachislot>
Next, the control system included in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a circuit block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71 provided on the middle door 41 and a sub control board 72 provided on the front door 2b. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a reel relay terminal board 74, a setting key type switch 54 (setting switch), and a cabinet-side relay board 44 connected to the main control board 71. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has an external centralized terminal board 47, a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75, a reset switch 76, and a power supply device 53 connected to the main control board 71 via a cabinet-side relay board 44. Since the configuration of the hopper device 51 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

The reel relay terminal plate 74 is arranged inside the reel main body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 74 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and by relaying a signal output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motor, each reel is relayed. The rotation of 3L, 3C, and 3R is controlled.

The setting key type switch 54 is provided on the main control board case 55. The setting key type switch 54 is used when changing the settings of the pachi-slot machine 1 (settings 1 to 6) or when confirming the settings of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The cabinet-side relay board 44 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the main control board 71 and the external centralized terminal board 47, the hopper device 51, the medal auxiliary storage switch 75, the reset switch 76, and the power supply device 53 is mounted. Is. The external centralized terminal board 47 is provided to output signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 is provided in the medal auxiliary storage 52, and detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals. The reset switch 76 is used, for example, when changing the setting of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The power supply device 53 includes a power supply board 53b and a power supply switch 53a connected to the power supply board 53b. The power switch 53a is pressed when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot machine 1. The power supply board 53b is connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet side relay board 44, and is also connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 61.

Further, the pachislot 1 has a selector 66, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77, and a settlement switch 78, which are connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 68 and the door relay terminal plate 68. It has a start switch 79, a stop switch board 80, a game operation display board 81, an auxiliary relay board 61, a first interface board 401 for a testing machine, and a second interface board 402 for a testing machine. Since the selector 66, the door open / close monitoring switch 67, and the sub-relay board 61 have been described above, their description will be omitted here.

The BET switch 77 (throwing operation detecting means) detects that the MAX bet button 15a or the 1-bet button 15b is pressed by the player. The settlement switch 78 detects that the settlement button (not shown) is pressed by the player. The start switch 79 (start operation detecting means) detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation).

The stop switch board 80 (stop operation detecting means) includes a circuit for stopping the rotating main reel and a circuit for displaying the stoptable main reel by an LED or the like. Further, the stop switch board 80 is provided with a stop switch (not shown). The stop switch detects that each of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is pressed by the player (stop operation).

The game operation display board 81 is connected to the information display 6 (7-segment display) and the LED 82. The LED 82 has, for example, three LEDs (hereinafter, “first LED” to “1st LED” to display the number of medals inserted, which are lit corresponding to the number of medals inserted in this game (hereinafter referred to as “the number of inserted medals”). An LED that lights a mark indicating that a medal can be inserted, a mark indicating the start of a game, a mark for replaying a game, etc., based on a signal input from the game operation display board 81 (referred to as "third LED"). Etc. are included. In the first LED to the third LED (display means), when one medal is inserted, the first LED lights up, and when two medals are inserted, the first and second LEDs light up, and three medals (game). (Number of startable sheets) When it is turned on, the first LED to the third LED are turned on. Since the information display 6 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

Both the first interface board 401 for the testing machine and the second interface board 402 for the testing machine are relay boards used when outputting various signals related to the game to the testing machine in the certification test (test firing test) of the pachislot 1 (testing test). Since these relay boards are not mounted on the Pachislot 1 as a release product for sale, the main control circuit 90 of the main control board 71 for sale includes the first interface board 401 for the tester and the tester. The various electronic components required to connect to the second interface board 402 are also not mounted). For example, a test signal for controlling a main operation related to a game (for example, internal lottery, reel stop control, etc.) is output via a first interface board 401 for a testing machine, and is determined by, for example, a main control board 71. The test signal and the like related to the pushed order navigation are output via the second interface board 402 for the testing machine.

The sub-control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the sub-relay board 61. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a speaker group 84, an LED group 85, a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63, a touch sensor 19, and a projected member moving mechanism 305 (display unit) connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 61. ). Since the touch sensor 19 and the projected member moving mechanism 305 have been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

The speaker group 84 includes speakers 65L and 65R and various speakers (not shown). The LED group 85 includes a lamp group 21 provided on the front panel 10, a light source that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel of the waist panel 12 from the back side, and the like. The 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 stores the open / close history information of the middle door 41. Further, the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 outputs a signal for displaying an error by the display device 11 to the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 150) when the middle door 41 is opened.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a ROM cartridge board 86 and a display device relay board 87 connected to the sub-control board 72. The ROM cartridge board 86 and the display device relay board 87 are housed in the sub-control board case 57 together with the sub-control board 72.

The ROM cartridge board 86 is a board for managing various control programs executed by the sub CPU 151, image (video) for production, audio (speaker group 84), light (LED group 85), and communication data. .. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 shows a specific example of the non-volatile storage unit (storage unit) according to the present invention.

The display device relay board 87 is a board that relays the connection wiring between the sub-control board 72, the projector 213 included in the display device 11, and the sub-display device 18. Since the projector 213 and the sub-display device 18 have been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit 90 mounted on the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 90 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The main control circuit 90 includes a microprocessor 91, a clock pulse generation circuit 92, a power management circuit 93, and a switching regulator 94 (power supply means).

The microprocessor 91 is a microprocessor with a security function for a gaming machine. The microprocessor 91 of the present embodiment is provided with various instruction codes (instruction codes dedicated to the main CPU 101) specific to the microprocessor 91 that can be specified on the source program. In the present embodiment, the instruction code dedicated to the main CPU 101 is used to improve the processing efficiency and reduce the program capacity. The internal configuration of the microprocessor 91 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 17 described later.

The clock pulse generation circuit 92 generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU, and outputs the generated clock pulse signal to the microprocessor 91. The microprocessor 91 executes a control program based on the input clock pulse signal.

The power supply management circuit 93 manages fluctuations in the DC 12V power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 53b (see FIG. 15). Then, the power supply management circuit 93 outputs a reset signal to the "XSRST" terminal of the microprocessor 91, for example, when the power is turned on (when the power supply voltage exceeds the starting voltage value (10V) from 0V). When a power failure occurs (when the power supply voltage falls below the failure voltage value (10.5V) from 12V), the power failure detection signal is output to the "XINT" terminal of the microprocessor 91. That is, the power management circuit 93 is a means (starting means) for outputting a reset signal (starting signal) to the microprocessor 91 when the power is turned on, and a power failure detection signal (power failure signal) to the microprocessor 91 when a power failure occurs. Also serves as a means for outputting (power outage means).

The switching regulator 94 is a DC / DC conversion circuit, generates a DC drive voltage (power supply voltage of DC 5 V) of the microprocessor 91, and outputs the generated DC drive voltage to the “VCC” terminal of the microprocessor 91.

<Microprocessor>
Next, the internal configuration of the microprocessor 91 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the microprocessor 91.

The microprocessor 91 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (first storage means), a main RAM 103 (second storage means), an external bus interface 104, a clock circuit 105, a reset controller 106, an arithmetic circuit 107, and the like. It has a random number circuit 110, a parallel port 111, an interrupt controller 112, a timer circuit 113, a first serial communication circuit 114, and a second serial communication circuit 115. Each of these parts constituting the microprocessor 91 is connected to each other via a signal bus 116.

The main CPU 101 executes various control programs based on the clock pulse generated by the clock circuit 105 to control the game operation in general. Here, reel stop control will be described as an example of the control operation of the main CPU 101.

The main CPU 101 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motors of each reel 3L, 3C, 3L (main reel) after detecting the reel index. As a result, the main CPU 101 manages the rotation angle of each reel (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated). The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. This reel index is, for example, an optical sensor having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion, and a detection piece provided at a predetermined position on each reel and interposed between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion due to the rotation of each main reel. It is detected by the provided reel position detection unit (not shown).

Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3L (main reel) will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 103. Then, each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses required for rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 103 is added one by one. The symbol counter is provided according to each reel. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection unit (not shown).

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol of each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

The main ROM 102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 101, various data tables, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub-control circuit 150, and the like. The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as internal winning combinations determined by executing the control program.

The external bus interface 104 is for electrically connecting the microprocessor 91 to the external signal bus (not shown) to which various components (for example, reels and the like) provided outside the microprocessor 91 are connected. It is an interface circuit. The clock circuit 105 is configured to include, for example, a frequency divider (not shown), and a clock pulse signal for CPU operation input from the clock pulse generation circuit 92 is transmitted by another component (for example, a timer circuit 113). Convert to a clock pulse signal of the frequency used. The clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 is also output to the reset controller 106.

The reset controller 106 resets the IAT (Illegal Address Trap) and the WDT (watchdog timer) based on the reset signal input from the power supply management circuit 93. The arithmetic circuit 107 includes a multiplication circuit and a division circuit. For example, when a multiplication instruction (“MUL” instruction) is executed on a source program, the arithmetic circuit 107 executes a multiplication process based on this instruction.

The random number circuit 110 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255). Although not shown, the random number circuit 110 has a random number register 0 for obtaining a 2-byte hard-latch random number, random number registers 1 to 3 for obtaining a 2-byte soft-latch random number, and a 1-byte soft-latch random number. It is composed of random number registers 4 to 7 for obtaining. The main CPU 101 extracts one value from the random numbers in a predetermined range generated by the random number circuit 110, for example, as a random number value for an internal lottery. The parallel port 111 is a port (memory map I / O) of signals input / output between the microprocessor 91 and various circuits (for example, power supply management circuit 93, etc.) provided outside the microprocessor 91. .. The parallel port 111 is also connected to the random number circuit 110 and the interrupt controller 112. The start switch 79 is connected to any input port of PI0 to PI4 of the parallel port 111, and at the timing (on-edge) when the start switch 79 is turned on, a latch signal is transmitted from the parallel port 111 to the random number register 0 of the random number circuit 110. Is output. Then, in the random number circuit 110, the random number register 0 is latched by the input of the latch signal, and a 2-byte hard latch random number is acquired.

The interrupt controller 112 interrupts processing by the main CPU 101 based on a power failure detection signal input from the power supply management circuit 93 via the parallel port 111 or a timeout signal input from the timer circuit 113 at a cycle of 1.1172 ms. Controls the execution timing of. When a power failure detection signal is input from the power management circuit 93, or when a timeout signal is input from the timer circuit 113, the interrupt controller 112 issues an interrupt request signal indicating an interrupt processing start command to the main CPU 101. Output to. The main CPU 101 has an input port check process, a reel control process, a communication data transmission process, a 7-segment LED drive process, and a timer based on an interrupt request signal input from the interrupt controller 112 in response to a timeout signal from the timer circuit 113. Performs various interrupt processing such as update processing.

The timer circuit 113 (PTC) operates with a clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 (a clock pulse signal having a frequency obtained by dividing the clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU by a divider (not shown)) ( Count the elapsed time). Then, the timer circuit 113 outputs a timeout signal (trigger signal) to the interrupt controller 112 at a cycle of 1.1172 msec.

The first serial communication circuit 114 is a circuit that controls a serial transmission operation when data (various control commands (commands)) are transmitted from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72. The second serial communication circuit 115 is a circuit that controls the serial transmission operation when data is transmitted from the main control board 71 to the second interface board 402 for the testing machine. That is, the first serial communication circuit 114 constitutes an information transmission means capable of transmitting command data to the sub-control circuit 150.

<Secondary control circuit>
[Configuration of sub-control circuit]
Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the configuration of the sub-control circuit 150 (sub-control means) mounted on the sub-control board 72 will be described. FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub-control circuit 150 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The sub control circuit 150 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 90, and performs processing such as determination and execution of the effect content based on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 90. The sub control circuit 150 is basically configured to include a sub CPU 151, a sub RAM 152, a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit) 153, a VRAM (Video RAM) 154, and a driver 155. The VRAM 154 (drawing RAM) includes a frame buffer and a screen buffer described later. The sub CPU 151 shows a specific example of the control processing unit according to the present invention, the GPU 153 shows a specific example of the image processing unit according to the present invention, and the VRAM 154 is a volatile storage unit. A specific example is shown.

The sub CPU 151 is connected to the ROM cartridge board 86. Further, the driver 155 is connected to the display device relay board 87. That is, the driver 155 is connected to the projector 213 and the sub-display device 18 via the display device relay board 87.

The sub CPU 151 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 86 in response to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 90. The ROM cartridge board 86 is basically composed of a program storage area and a data storage area.

The control program executed by the sub CPU 151 is stored in the program storage area. For example, in the control program, the main board communication task for controlling the communication with the main control circuit 90 and the effect registration for extracting the random value for the effect and determining and registering the effect content (effect data). Contains various programs for executing tasks. Further, the control program includes a drawing control task that controls the display of an image by the display device 11 based on the determined effect content, a lamp control task that controls the output of light by a light source such as the LED group 85, and a sound by the speaker group 84. It also includes various programs for executing voice control tasks and the like that control the output of.

The data storage area stores a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing production data constituting each production content, and animation data (including image data and virtual object data described later) related to video creation. Contains storage area. Further, the data storage area includes a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to a pattern of turning on and off light, and the like.

The sub RAM 152 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect content and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as a sub flag (internal winning combination) transmitted from the main control circuit 90.

The sub CPU 151, GPU 153 (rendering processor), VRAM 154, and driver 155 create an image based on the animation data specified by the effect content, and the created image is displayed on the display device 11 (projector 213) and / or the sub display device 18. Display. The display device 11 (projector 213) and the sub-display device 18 are individually controlled by the sub-control board 72.

Further, the sub CPU 151 causes the speaker group 84 to output a sound such as BGM based on the sound data designated by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 151 controls lighting and extinguishing of the LED group 85 based on the lamp data designated by the effect content.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example of adopting a method (front projection) in which the light of the projector is projected from the surface side of the projection surface (screen) of the projected member to display an image has been described. The invention is not limited to this. For example, a method (rear projection) in which the light of the projector is projected onto the screen from the back surface (rear surface) side to display the image may be adopted, and the optimum effect can be obtained even in this case. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, as the display device, for example, a liquid crystal display device or a display device such as an organic / inorganic EL can be used instead of the projector.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment of the display device will be described. The pachi-slot machine of the second embodiment includes a display device 120 (see FIG. 19) instead of the display device 11 (for example, see FIG. 5) included in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment. The display device 120 included in the pachi-slot machine of the second embodiment is different from the above-mentioned display device 11 provided in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that the projected block is configured and the front panel 10 is rearward. This is a point in which the effect unit 900 (see FIG. 45) is provided. That is, the pachi-slot machine of the second embodiment includes the projected block 203 (see FIG. 19) instead of the projected block 202. Further, instead of the front panel 10, a front panel 500 (see FIG. 45) is provided. The other configurations except the display device 120 (more specifically, the projected block 203) are the same as those of the first embodiment except that the front effect unit 900 is provided.

FIG. 19 is an external perspective view of the display device 120 according to the second embodiment, and the display device 120 includes a projection block 201 and a projected block 203 arranged below the projection block 201. On the projected block 203, the image projected by the image light projected from the projector 213 is reflected and projected on the reflecting member 212 (see, for example, FIG. 6). 20 is a perspective view of the projected block 203, and FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view of the projected block 203 shown in FIG. 20.

FIG. 20 shows a case where the image light projected from the projector 213 is projected onto the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712, which will be described later. Therefore, for reference, the image light projected from the projector 213. 22 is shown in FIG. 22 when the image is projected onto the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, which will be described later, and the image light projected from the projector 213 is projected onto the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716, which will be described later. The case where this is done is shown in FIG.

The projector 213 capable of projecting image light toward the projection surfaces 7123, 714, 7167 constitutes a display means or a projection means.

<Projected block>
As shown in FIGS. 19 to 21, the projected block 203 has a movable screen unit 700, a pair of screen drive bases (left screen drive base 702, right screen drive base 704), and a lower portion of the movable screen unit 700. A fixed base 708 provided, an upper base 706 provided on the upper back surface of the movable screen unit 700, a drive mechanism 815 capable of rotating the pillar screen 710 described later of the movable screen unit 700, and a movable screen unit 700. The rotation shaft 722 (see, for example, FIG. 21), which is the center of the rotation, the stopper mechanism 790 (for example, see FIG. 37, which will be described later) for blocking the rotation of the movable screen unit 700, and the rotation direction of the movable screen unit 700. The present invention includes an optical sensor unit 800 (for example, see FIG. 40 described later) that functions as a position detecting means for detecting a position in the screen. In the following description, the case where the movable screen unit 700 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the right side of the pachislot is referred to as "forward rotation", and the case where the movable screen unit 700 is rotated counterclockwise is referred to as "reverse rotation". Further, when the movable screen unit 700 is rotated in the forward direction, it is assumed that the motor 812 is rotating in the positive direction (forward rotation). Further, when the movable screen unit 700 is rotated in the reverse direction, it is assumed that the motor 812 is rotated in the reverse direction (reverse rotation).

(1) Movable screen unit FIG. 24 is an external perspective view of the movable screen unit 700. As shown in FIG. 24, the movable screen unit 700 includes a triangular prism pillar screen 710 with a hollow inside (see, for example, FIG. 25 described later) and a right base 732 that closes the right side surface of the pillar screen 710 when viewed from the front. A left base 736 (see FIG. 25 described later) that closes the left side surface of the prism screen 710 when viewed from the front, and a rotary gear mechanism 740 are provided.

In this specification, "front" means the front of the pachislot machine. Therefore, "front view" means that the pachislot is viewed from the front.

FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the movable screen unit 700 disassembled into a prism screen 710, a right base 732, a left base 736, and a rotary gear mechanism 740.

(1-1) Prism Screen The configuration of the prism screen 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. 26 and 27 are both exploded perspective views of the prism screen 710, and the angles at which the prism screen 710 is viewed are different between FIGS. 26 and 27.

The prism screen 710 includes a first screen member 712, a second screen member 714, and a third screen member 716. The first screen member 712, the second screen member 714, and the third screen member 716 are all formed into a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

The first screen member 712 includes a rectangular flat panel 7121 and a flat panel base 7125.

The flat panel 7121 has a projection surface 7123 (lower surface shown in FIGS. 26 and 27) on which the image projected from the projector 213 is displayed, and the projection surface 7123 and the back surface 7124 of the projection surface 7123. Are all flat.

The flat panel base 7125 is a base that serves as a base for the flat panel 7121, and has a function of increasing the rigidity of the first screen member 712. The flat panel 7121 is fixed to the front surface side (lower surface side shown in FIGS. 26 and 27) of the flat panel base 7125 by a predetermined method such as an engaging means or an adhesive means. Further, on the flat panel base 7125, a rib group 7126 composed of a large number of ribs is formed on the back surface side (upper surface side shown in FIGS. 26 and 27).

The second screen member 714 has a rectangular shape in front view and has a projection surface 7141 on which an image projected from the projector 213 is displayed. The projection surface 7141 is a view of the course from the bow. It is a concave curved surface that makes you imagine.

The third screen member 716 includes a three-dimensional object 7166 and a three-dimensional object base 7161 having a rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front. Both the surface of the three-dimensional object 7166 and the surface of the three-dimensional object base 7161 function as a projection surface 7167 on which the image projected from the projector 213 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the three-dimensional shaped object 7166 has a convex shape reminiscent of an open book. On the projection surface 7167 of the three-dimensional object 7166, an image as if characters are written on a book or an image of turning pages can be displayed by projection from the projector 213. The three-dimensional object base 7161 has two openings 7163, and the openings are closed by the three-dimensional object 7166 so that the two openings 7163 cannot be visually recognized from the front. Although the surface of both the three-dimensional object 7166 and the three-dimensional object base 7161 functions as a projection surface, the three-dimensional object has a convex shape, and therefore the periphery thereof (for example, the surface of the three-dimensional object base 7161). Has a shaded area.

As described above, both the surface of the three-dimensional object 7166 and the surface of the three-dimensional object base 7161 are not limited to functioning as a projection surface 7167 on which the image projected from the projector 213 is displayed. Of the three-dimensional shape object 7166 and the three-dimensional shape object base 7161, only the surface of the three-dimensional shape object 7166 may function as the projection surface 7167, and the surface of the three-dimensional shape object base 7161 may not function as the projection surface 7167.

In this way, when each projection surface 7123, 7141, 7167 has a different three-dimensional (undulating) shape and the image light corresponding to the three-dimensional shape of each projection surface is projected from the projector 213, each projection surface 7123, 7141, With the features of the 7167 three-dimensional shape and the image light, it is possible to realize a realistic effect for the player.

FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the prism screen 710 as viewed from a direction in which the male rib 7145 is sandwiched between the female ribs 7164, which will be described later, can be visually recognized. Further, FIG. 29 is a side view of the prism screen 710 as viewed from the right side.

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, in the pillar screen 710, the end on the long side of the first screen member 712 and the end on the long side of the second screen member 714 are joined to each other. The end on the long side of the second screen member 714 and the end on the long side of the third screen member 716 are joined to each other, and the end on the long side of the third screen member 716 and the first The ends of the screen member 712 on the long side are joined to each other. In this way, the three screen members 712,714,716 form a hollow triangular column.

The second screen member 714 has a groove 7142 formed along the long side on the back surface on the side to be joined to the first screen member 712. Then, the end on the long side of the first screen member 712 is applied to the groove 7142 so that the end on the long side of the first screen member 712 and the end on the long side of the second screen member 714 are formed. It is joined to the end. As a result, it is possible to fill the gap between the two end portions of the first screen member 712 on the long side side and the end portion of the second screen member 714 on the long side side. Therefore, the movable screen unit 700 is in a position where the joint portion (corner portion of the triangular prism) between the end portion on the long side side of the first screen member 712 and the end portion on the long side side of the second screen member 714 can be seen from the front. Is located, it reduces the discomfort that can be caused by the gap between the long side end of the first screen member 712 and the long side end of the second screen member 714. be able to.

Further, the second screen member 714 is formed with a groove 7143 along the long side on the back surface on the side where the third screen member 716 is joined. Then, the end on the long side of the third screen member 716 is applied to the groove 7143 so that the end on the long side of the second screen member 714 and the end on the long side of the third screen member 716 are placed. It is joined to the end. As a result, it is possible to fill the gap between the two end portions of the second screen member 714 on the long side side and the end portion of the third screen member 716 on the long side side, and a gap can be formed. Can reduce the discomfort that can be caused by.

Further, the third screen member 716 is formed with a groove 7163 along the long side on the back surface on the side to be joined to the first screen member 712. Then, the end on the long side of the first screen member 712 is applied to the groove 7163 so that the end on the long side of the third screen member 716 and the end on the long side of the first screen member 712 are formed. It is joined to the end. As a result, it is possible to fill the gap between the two end portions of the third screen member 716 on the long side side and the end portion of the first screen member 712 on the long side side, and a gap is formed. Can reduce the discomfort that can be caused by.

In this way, the gaps that may occur in the corners (joints) of the triangular columnar pillar screen 710 are filled, so that even when the corners of the pillar screen 710 face the front, the projector 213 projects. It is possible to suppress the interruption of the continuity of the image to be performed as much as possible, and it is possible to reduce the discomfort that may be caused by the gap. Here, "the continuity of the image is interrupted" means that when one image is projected, one image is divided like a shadow or a streak that crosses the one image. It is equivalent to doing something like that. For example, if an unintended shadow or streak that crosses the character's face occurs while the character's face is projected, the projected image will be interrupted, giving a sense of discomfort. There is a risk that the interest will decline. Therefore, by filling the gaps that may occur at the corners of the prism, the continuity of the image can be maintained as much as possible, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

The second screen member 714 has male ribs 7145 protruding from the back surface formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction near the joint with the third screen member 716 (for example, FIGS. 27 and 28). reference). Further, in the third screen member 716, female ribs 7164 (two ribs) protruding from the back surface are formed at a portion corresponding to the above-mentioned male ribs 7145 (for example, FIGS. 27 and 28, which will be described later). See 32). Then, when both ribs 7145 and 7164 are engaged, the male rib 7145 is sandwiched by the female rib 7164, and the second screen member 714 and the third screen member 716 are firmly joined at both ends in the left-right direction. Will be done.

30 is an exploded perspective view of the first screen member 712 and the second screen member 714, FIG. 31 is a sectional perspective view taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 29, and FIG. 32 is a sectional perspective view taken along the line AA. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the 1st screen member 712 and the 3rd screen member 716.

As shown in FIG. 30, the second screen member 714 has two rod-shaped arm members 7144 extending from the back surface toward the flat panel base 7125 side on the first screen member 712 side of the mid-abdomen in the longitudinal direction. Is provided. The arm member 7144 is fixed to the flat panel base 7125 via the screen locking member 718.

More specifically, the screen locking member 718 is formed with two insertion holes 7182 through which the arm member 7144 can be inserted. Further, a pair of screen locking ribs 7128 for fixing the screen locking member 718 are formed on the back surface of the flat panel base 7125. Then, the arm member 7144 is inserted into the insertion hole 7182 and then screwed with a screw 717, and then the pair of screen locking ribs 7128 and the screen locking member 718 are screwed with a screw 719. The screen member 712 of the first screen member 712 and the second screen member 714 are firmly joined to each other in the middle abdomen in the left-right direction. By the way, when two screen members are joined, a gap is generated between the two screen members (particularly in the middle abdomen) due to the clearance between the two screen members and the distortion generated when the screen paint is coated. There is a risk. In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the first screen member 712 and the second screen member 714 are firmly joined in the middle abdomen in the left-right direction, the first screen member 712 and the second screen member 714 are respectively. It is possible to suppress the generation of a gap between the two that may occur in the mid-abdomen in the longitudinal direction of the.

As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the three-dimensional object base 7161 constituting the third screen member 716 has two rods extending from the back surface toward the flat panel base 7125 side in the middle abdomen in the longitudinal direction. An arm member 7162 is provided. Further, a pair of screen locking ribs 7129 for fixing the screen locking member 718 are formed on the back surface of the flat panel base 7125. Then, after inserting the arm member 7162 through the insertion hole 7182 of the screen locking member 718, the arm member 7162 is screwed with the screw 717, and then the pair of screen locking ribs 7129 and the screen locking member 718 are screwed with the screw 719. By stopping, the first screen member 712 and the third screen member 716 are firmly joined in the middle abdomen in the left-right direction. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the generation of a gap between the first screen member 712 and the third screen member 716, which may occur in the middle abdomen in the longitudinal direction of each of the third screen member 716.

The prism screen 710 of the present embodiment is hollow, but is not limited to this, and is a solid or a mixture of a hollow portion and a solid portion (hereinafter referred to as "semi-solid"). You may. For example, when it is desired to increase the rigidity of the column screen 710, it is preferable to make it solid, and when it is desired to reduce the weight of the column screen 710, it is preferable to make it hollow. Further, the ratio of the hollow portion to the solid portion may be appropriately changed to reduce the weight as much as possible while maintaining the rigidity of the prism screen 710. Further, if the three-dimensional shapes of the projection surfaces 7123, 714, 7167 are different as in the present embodiment, the pillar screen 710 may be unbalanced when rotated. Therefore, by adjusting the ratio and location of the solid portion and the hollow portion, it is possible to suppress the imbalance of the three-dimensional shapes of the projection surfaces 7123, 714, 7167 even though they are different.

Further, the prism screen 710 of the present embodiment is a prism screen 710 of a triangular prism, but is not necessarily limited to a triangular prism, and may be a prism screen of a square prism or a pillar screen of a more polygonal prism. However, considering that the screen on which the image projected from the projector 213 is displayed may be changed from the current screen to a specific screen, a triangular prismatic pillar screen is preferable. This is because if it is a polygonal prism that is more than a square prism, it may be forced to go through an unrelated screen before changing from the current screen to a specific screen, but if it is a triangular prism, it may be forced to go through an unrelated screen. , You can change from the current screen to a specific screen without going through an irrelevant screen. This is because when the prism screen is a triangular prism, any of the three screens is adjacent to the other two screens.

Further, although the prism screen 710 of the present embodiment has a prism shape, it does not necessarily have to be a prism screen, and for example, it has a substantially L-shape composed of two screens adjacent to each other. It may be a screen, or it may be a substantially U-shaped screen composed of three screens adjacent to each other.

Further, in the prismatic screen 710 of the present embodiment, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 is flat, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 is concave, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716 ( More specifically, the projection surface 7167 of the three-dimensional shape object 7166; the same shall apply hereinafter) is convex, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is a combination of a plurality of three-dimensional shapes of flat, concave and convex. May be.

Further, in the prism screen 710 of the present embodiment, all three projection surfaces 7123, 714, 7167 have different three-dimensional shapes, but the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one projection surface has a three-dimensional shape. If it is different from the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface of, it is possible to change the visual impression and enhance the interest. For example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 and the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 have similar three-dimensional shapes, and only the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716 has a different three-dimensional shape. The case corresponds.

Further, the area size on which the image projected from the projector 213 is displayed and the material of the projection surface are the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the third screen. It may be the same as or different from the projection surface 7167 of the member 716.

(1-2) Right Base, Left Base, and Rotary Gear Mechanism With reference to FIG. 25, the configurations of the right base 732, the left base 736, and the rotary gear mechanism 740 will be described.

A trapezoidal right base 732 is attached to the right opening end surface of the prism screen 710, and a triangular left base 736 is attached to the left opening end surface of the prism screen 710. On the right base 732, a small high cylindrical portion 707 projecting to the front surface side (outward right) of the prism screen 710 is extended. A rotary gear mechanism 740 is fixed to the cylindrical portion 707.

The right base 732 has a trapezoidal shape having a short side portion 7322 and a long side portion 7324, and two rod-shaped weight members 7326 are provided on the back surface (inward left) in the vicinity of the long side portion 7324. .. Similarly, the left base 736 has a trapezoidal shape having a short side portion 7362 and a long side portion 7364, and two rod-shaped weight members 7366 are provided in the vicinity of the long side portion 7364 (inward right). ..

The weight members 7326 and 7366 are provided to balance the rotation of the prism screen 710. That is, since the prismatic screen 710 of the present embodiment has different three-dimensional shapes of the projection surfaces 7123, 7141, 7167 on which the image projected from the projector 213 is displayed, it is between the projection surfaces 7123, 714, 7167. There is a risk that the rotation balance will be unbalanced due to a weight difference. It is considered that such an imbalance may occur when the rotation axis 722 and the center of gravity in the longitudinal direction of the prism screen 710 are largely deviated from each other. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the weight members 7326 and 7366 are provided, the rib group 7126 is formed on the back surface of the flat panel base 7125 of the first screen member 712, and the three-dimensional shape of the third screen member 716 is formed. By providing an opening 7163 in the base 7161, the center of gravity in the longitudinal direction of the pillar screen 710 is brought closer to the rotation axis 722 so that the two are as coaxial as possible, and the rotation balance is suppressed from becoming unbalanced. is doing.

The quantity and installation location of the weight members 7326 and 7366, the quantity and formation location of the rib group 7126, the size and formation location of the opening 7163, and the like may be appropriately adjusted.

Further, in the prism screen 710, the cylindrical portion 707 and the rotary gear mechanism 740 are present on the right side surface (right base 732), while these are not present on the left side surface (left base 736), so that the prism screen 710 is not present. When trying to rotate the screen member, torsional stress is applied to each screen member 712,714,716. In particular, the torsional stress applied to the first screen member 712 whose projection surface is flat is considered to be remarkable. In this respect, in the present embodiment, as described above, the flat panel base 7125 is provided as the base of the flat panel 7121, and the rib group 7126 is formed on the back surface of the flat panel base 7125, so that the rigidity is enhanced. .. That is, the rib group 7126 has a function of suppressing the rotation balance from becoming unbalanced and a function of increasing the rigidity.

Attached to the back surface of the first screen member 712 (more specifically, the back surface of the flat panel base 7125) at both ends in the longitudinal direction and at the end on the side joining the third screen member 716. Demarcating ribs 7122 are formed (see, eg, FIGS. 24-29). The mounting demarcation rib 7122 has a triangular shape that closes the side surface of the column screen 710 by being adjacent to the short side portions 7322, 7362 of each base 732,736. Therefore, when the side surface on the right side of the front view of the prism screen 710 is closed by the right base 732, the orientation of the right base 732 can be easily determined only by adjoining the mounting demarcation rib 7122 and the short side portion 7322. When the left side surface of the pillar screen 710 in front view is closed by the left base 736, the orientation of the left base 736 is defined only by adjoining the mounting demarcation rib 7122 and the short side portion 7362.

Since the mounting demarcation rib 7122 has a function of improving workability when the side surface of the column screen 710 is closed by the right base 732 and the left base 736, it is formed if the function can be maintained. The location and shape of the screen is not limited. For example, such a mounting demarcation rib 7122 is formed on the back surface of the third screen member 716 at both ends in the longitudinal direction and at the end on the side joining the first screen member 712. Is also good. Further, a part of the mounting demarcation rib 7122 is formed on the back surface of the first screen member 712, and a part of the mounting demarcation rib 7122 on the back surface of the third screen member 716 is formed to form the first screen member 712. When the third screen member 716 is joined, the mounting demarcation rib 7122 adjacent to the short side portion 7322 of the right base 732 and the short side portion 7362 of the left base 736 may be formed. Further, the mounting demarcation rib 7122 may be formed at the joint portion between the first screen member 712 and the second screen member 714, or the second screen member 714 and the third screen member 716 may be formed. The mounting demarcation rib 7122 may be formed at the joint. Furthermore, the shape of the right base 732 and the left base 736 does not have to be trapezoidal, and if the orientation of the right base or the left base can be defined by adjoining a positioning member such as the mounting defining rib 7122, the right base, The shape of the left base and the positioning member is not limited to a specific shape, and the number is not limited to one and may be two.

The rotary gear mechanism 740 is integrally composed of a large-diameter gear 742 and a gear-shaped portion 744 having a diameter smaller than that of the large-diameter gear 742, and has a cylindrical portion 707 so as to be coaxial with the rotary shaft 722 of the column screen 710. It is fixed to.

The large-diameter gear 742 has teeth formed over the entire circumference at a pitch of 5 degrees, and the gear-shaped portion 744 has protrusions 7442 that project outward in the radial direction at a pitch of 10 degrees. That is, 72 teeth of 742 of the large-diameter gear 7 are formed at substantially equal intervals over the entire circumference, and 36 protrusions 7442 of the gear shape portion 744 are formed at substantially equal intervals over the entire circumference. However, the pitch of the teeth of the large-diameter gear 742 and the pitch of the protrusion 7442 formed on the gear shape portion 744 are not limited to this, and can be appropriately changed. The function of the gear shape portion 744 will be described later.

(2) Screen Driven Base, Fixed Base and Upper Base The screen driven base, fixed base and upper base will be described with reference to FIG. 21.

The screen drive base (left screen drive base 702 and right screen drive base 704) supports the rotating shaft 722 on both the left and right sides, and supports the movable screen unit 700, the fixed base 708, and the upper base 706 on both the left and right sides. There is. More specifically, the left and right ends of the fixed base 708 and the upper base 706 are fixed by the left screen drive base 702 and the right screen drive base 704, and the movable screen unit 700 is provided in the internal space of the assembly of the plurality of bases. Is stored.

The fixed base 708 is located below the movable screen unit 700, and the surface 7084 on the movable screen unit 700 side is formed in a curved shape so as not to hinder the rotation of the movable screen unit 700. At the front end of the fixed base 708, a rectangular lower screen 7082 that is long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front is provided. The lower screen 7082 functions as a projection surface on which an image projected from the projector 213 is displayed together with any one of the projection surfaces 7123, 7141, 7167 of each screen member 712,714,716. That is, one of the projection planes 7123, 714, 7167 of each screen member 712, 714, 716 and the lower screen 7082 form one projection plane (projection plane). However, the lower screen 7082 does not move (rotate) like the movable screen unit 700 (pillar screen 710), and functions as a fixed screen on which image light is projected from the projector 213.

It should be noted that there are a plurality of undulations on the surface of the lower screen 7082, which is a curved surface that curves in the front-rear direction. As a result, the image projected on the lower screen 7082 can also have a three-dimensional effect. However, the present invention does not mean that the lower screen 7082 is flat.

The upper base 706 has a substantially L-shaped long cross section that crosses the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction), and the surface 7084 on the movable screen unit 700 side is curved so as not to hinder the rotation of the movable screen unit 700. It is formed.

(3) Drive Mechanism The configuration of the drive mechanism 815 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the right screen drive base 704 and the drive mechanism 815. FIG. 34 is a perspective view of the movable screen unit 700 as viewed from the right side. However, in FIG. 34, the motor base 816, the motor 812, and the stopper mechanism 790, which will be described later, are not shown.

The drive mechanism 815 is provided on the right screen drive base 704, and the movable screen unit 700 (for example, see FIG. 21) is rotated forward or backward with the rotation shaft 722 (for example, see FIG. 21) as the center of rotation. , The projection surface on which the image light projected from the projector 213 is displayed (projected) can be switched. In the present embodiment, the clockwise rotation when the movable screen unit 700 is viewed from the right side is a forward rotation (rotation in the direction in which the pillar screen 710 moves from the bottom to the top when viewed from the front), and is counterclockwise. Rotation around is defined as reverse rotation (rotation in the direction in which the pillar screen 710 moves from top to bottom in front view).

The drive mechanism 815 mainly includes a motor 812 as a drive source for rotating the movable screen unit 700 (see, for example, FIG. 21), a reduction mechanism 818, and an intermediate gear 820.

The motor 812 is a stepping motor having a drive shaft 814, and is attached to the right screen drive base 704 via the motor base 816 and the mechanism cover 810 described later. Further, gear groups such as the reduction mechanism 818 and the intermediate gear 820 are covered with the mechanism cover 810.

The reduction mechanism 818 has a reduction gear 8182 and a driven gear 8184, and is rotatably supported by the right screen drive base 704 via a bearing 819. Further, the intermediate gear 820 is rotatably supported by the right screen drive base 704 via the bearing 821.

A motor base 816 to which the motor 812 is attached is attached to the mechanism cover 810. The rotation shaft (drive shaft 814) of the motor penetrates the mechanism cover 810 and meshes with the driven gear 8184 to rotate the reduction gear 8182. The reduction gear 8182 meshes with the intermediate gear 820, and the intermediate gear 820 meshes with the large diameter gear 742 of the rotary gear mechanism 740 of the right base 732 (see, for example, FIG. 25). The right screen drive base 704 is provided with a case area 830 for accommodating the rotary gear mechanism 740.

A lower notch 832 is formed diagonally to the lower right of the case region 830, and the large-diameter gear 742 is partially exposed to the lower notch 832 and meshes with the intermediate gear 820. Therefore, when the motor 812 rotates, the large-diameter gear 742 rotates via the reduction mechanism 818 and the intermediate gear 820 based on the rotation of the drive shaft 814. The large-diameter gear 742 is a movable screen unit by rotating the right base 732 (for example, see FIGS. 24 and 25) to which the large-diameter gear 742 is fixed via the cylindrical portion 707 (see, for example, FIG. 25). The 700 rotates about the rotation shaft 722 (axis).

Here, the sub-control board 72 outputs a motor drive control signal to the drive driver of the motor 812, and controls the rotation direction and the rotation angle of the drive shaft 814. An upper notch 834 is formed in the upper part of the case region 830, and a part of the rotary gear mechanism 740 is exposed here. Then, although the details will be described later, the stopper mechanism 790 described later engages with the gear shape portion 744 of the rotary gear mechanism 740 via the upper notch portion 834, and prevents the movable screen unit 700 from rotating to the current position. It can be fastened.

(4) Rotation axis FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view seen from above when the projected block 203 is cut in the horizontal direction so as to include the rotation axis 722. The left end of the rotating shaft 722 penetrates the left base center hole 739 of the left base 736 and is fixed to the boss portion 739A of the left screen drive base 702. The right end of the rotary shaft 722 penetrates the center of the right base 732 (right base center hole 735) and the center of the rotary gear mechanism 740 and is fixed to the right screen drive base 704. The rotary shaft 722 is supported by the left base center hole 739 of the left base 736 via the left bearing 852, and is supported by the center hole 7402 of the rotary gear mechanism 740 via the right bearing 724. As a result, the movable screen unit 700 can rotate forward or backward with the rotation shaft 722 as the center (axis). That is, the screen unit 700 (pillar screen 710) rotatable about the rotation shaft 722 constitutes a movable member.

The movable screen unit 700 (pillar screen 710) of the present embodiment only rotates forward or reverse around the rotation axis 722, but is not limited to rotation, and is driven to move, for example, a position. It may be a thing.

A coil spring 725 is provided at the left end of the rotating shaft 722. The coil spring 725 is built in the case body 854. The left end of the case body 854 does not abut on the boss portion 739A, but the right end abuts on the left bearing 852, whereby a certain distance can be maintained between the left base 736 and the left screen drive base 702. , The left base 736 can be prevented from coming into contact with the left screen drive base 702. Further, the coil spring 725 absorbs the backlash in the left-right direction.

(5) Stopper Mechanism The configuration of the stopper mechanism 790 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 39. FIG. 36 is a perspective view of the right side surface of the projected block 203 as viewed from the front side. In FIG. 36, the right screen drive base 704 is not shown. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a state in which the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 is not blocked by the stopper mechanism 790. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a state in which the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 is blocked by the stopper mechanism 790. FIG. 39 is an enlarged view of a portion X shown in FIG. 38.

The stopper mechanism 790 includes a solenoid 792 that can be operated in the vertical direction and a stopper 794 that moves up and down with the vertical movement of the solenoid 792. The solenoid 792 and the stopper 794 are housed in the case body 796. Attached to the right screen drive base 704.

In the solenoid 792, the plunger 7922 (see, for example, FIGS. 37 and 38) is located upward when the coil is energized, and the plunger 7922 is directed downward when the coil is de-energized and becomes non-excited. Operates (falls).

The stopper 794 is provided below the main body portion 7942 and the main body portion 7942 connected so as to be able to move up and down with the vertical movement of the solenoid 792 (plunger 7922), and is provided with the vertical movement of the main body portion 7942. It has a stopper pin 7944 that moves up and down.

The stopper mechanism 790 is arranged directly above the gear shape portion 744. More specifically, the stopper mechanism 790 is arranged so that the stopper pin 7944 can move forward and backward with respect to the gear shape portion 744. In the stopper mechanism 790, in a state where the projection surface of the movable screen member 700 is at the origin position of the projection surface described later, the stopper pin 7944 and the one protrusion 7442 and the other protrusion 7442 adjacent to the one protrusion 7442 It is configured to have a positional relationship facing the groove 7444 between them in the vertical direction.

The sub-control board 72 uses a projection surface (any of the projection planes 7123, 7141, 7167) on which the image projected from the projector 213 is displayed as another projection surface (any of the projection planes 7123, 7141, 7167). When changing to the projection surface), the motor 812 is driven to rotate the movable screen unit 700. Then, as will be described in detail later, the sub-control board 72 puts the solenoid 792 in a non-excited state after a predetermined time has elapsed after executing the control to stop the movable screen unit 700 at a target position (predetermined predetermined position). The stopper pin 7944 is advanced to the gear shape portion 744 in the inner diameter direction (downward) of the gear shape portion 744. When the stopper pin 7944 advanced to the gear shape portion 744 engages with the groove 7444, the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 is prevented while the projection surface of the movable screen member 700 is at the origin position of the projection surface described later. .. In this way, the sub-control board 72 can reliably stop the movable screen unit 700 at a desired rotation position without shifting the position.

By the way, the stopper mechanism 790 has a knob 795 that can manually move the stopper pin 7944 up and down. Therefore, even if the position shift occurs when the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 is stopped, the stopper pin 7944 that has advanced to the gear shape portion 744 can be retracted by moving the knob 795 upward. When the stopper pin 7944 retracts from the gear shape portion 744, the movable screen unit 700 can be manually rotated, so that the above-mentioned misalignment can be corrected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 39, the stopper pin 7944 is cut (chamfered) so that the corner portion of the tip portion is tapered toward the tip portion. As a result, even if the stopper 794 is caught in the middle of the advance and the advance is incomplete, if the protrusion 7442 acts on the stopper pin 7944 due to the rotation of the gear shape portion 744, the stopper pin 7944 can be easily operated. It will be pushed upward, and it will be possible to suppress the occurrence of malfunction of the movable screen unit 700. Further, in addition to this, the tip of the protrusion 7442 of the gear shape portion 744 is also cut so as to taper toward the tip. Therefore, when the stopper 794 advances to the gear shape portion 744, it is possible to prevent the stopper 794 from being caught in the middle of the process until the stopper 794 engages with the groove 7444.

Further, the protrusion 7442 of the gear shape portion 744 has an inclined portion 74421 that is inclined so as to bulge in the circumferential direction (rotational direction) from the base end portion toward the tip end portion. That is, the groove 7444 between one protrusion 7442 and another protrusion 7442 adjacent to the one protrusion has a bowl shape in which the width in the circumferential direction decreases from the radial inner side to the radial outer side. ing. Therefore, once the stopper pin 7944 engages with the groove 7444, even if the stopper pin 7944 acts on the stopper pin 7944 from the protrusion 7442, it is possible to prevent the stopper pin 7944 from being easily pushed upward.

As described above, the protrusion 7442 of the gear shape portion 744 has an inclined portion 74421 that inclines so as to bulge in the circumferential direction from the base end portion toward the tip end portion, while the stopper pin 7944 is shown in FIG. 39. As such, it extends in the substantially vertical direction without inclining above the cut tip. Therefore, when the stopper pin 7944 and the protrusion 7442 come into contact with each other, the corner portion 74422 formed at the radially outer end of the inclined portion 74421 of the protrusion 7442 and the stopper pin 7944 come into contact with each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an inclined portion may be formed on the side surface of the stopper pin 7944 (the surface that abuts on the protrusion 7442) so that the stopper pin 7944 and the protrusion 7442 come into contact with each other. ..

(6) Optical Sensor Unit The configuration of the optical sensor unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33, 34 and 40. FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the movable screen unit as viewed from the right side, and is a view showing the optical sensor unit 800 so that it can be visually recognized. The optical sensor unit 800 detects the position of the rotating movable screen unit 700 in the rotation direction, and is an optical sensor that uses an optical sensor to block the optical path between the light emitting element and the light receiving element of the optical sensor. Is, and the position is detected based on the timing at which the optical path is blocked.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the optical sensor unit 800, three optical sensors 802, 804, and 806 are arranged radially at equal angle intervals in the right screen drive base 704. The optical sensor 802 detects that the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 is located at the origin position of the projection surface described later, and the optical sensor 804 detects that the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 is described later. The optical sensor 806 detects that the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716 is located at the projection surface origin position described later. The optical sensor unit 800 is inserted and fixed in a radial groove 801 formed in the end surface of the case region 830 of the rotary gear mechanism 740 of the right screen drive base 704. That is, each optical sensor does not rotate with respect to the rotating movable screen unit 700.

On the end face of the rotary gear mechanism 740 provided on the right base 732 (see, for example, FIG. 24), a small arc-shaped light-shielding piece 791 is projected at a right angle toward the optical sensor unit 800 side. The shading piece 791 has a width (length) of about 50 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The light-shielding piece 791 blocks the optical paths of the three optical sensors 802, 804, 806 in order in the process of moving the light-shielding piece 791 by the rotation of the movable screen unit 700. Since the optical path is blocked when the light-shielding piece 791 passes between the light-emitting element and the light-receiving element, the sub-control board 72 that monitors the detection signal from the optical sensor has reached which optical sensor the light-shielding piece 791 has reached. Can be determined. As described above, since the three optical sensors 802,804,806 correspond to the screen members 712,714,716, the sub-control board 72 in the rotation direction depends on which optical sensor the light-shielding piece 791 blocks. The position of the movable screen unit 700 can be determined.

That is, each optical sensor 802,804,806 capable of detecting that each projection surface 7123, 714, 7167 is located at the origin position of the projection surface described later is the first position detection means to the first position detection means. Three position detecting means are configured. Further, the light-shielding piece 791 detected by each of the optical sensors 802,804,806 that rotates with the rotation of the prism screen 710 constitutes a position detection member.

Further, when one end of the light-shielding piece 791 in the circumferential direction reaches one of the optical sensors (the optical sensor of any one of the optical sensors 802, 804, 806), the tip of the screen appears on the front side. When the other end of the light-shielding piece is separated from the optical sensor and the other end of the screen is retracted from the front side, the sub-control board 72 is based on the output timing of the optical sensor and the number of pulses of the motor drive signal. , It is possible to accurately determine where the screen is located. As a result, the sub-control board 72 can accurately project the video light onto the screen, and the video light can be changed according to the position of the screen.

Further, as described above, the light-shielding piece 791 has a length of about 50 degrees in the circumferential direction. In the control of stopping the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 by the sub-control board 72, one end of the light-shielding piece 791 in the circumferential direction reaches the optical sensor (the optical sensor of any one of the optical sensors 802, 804 and 806). However, the length of the light-shielding piece 791 in the circumferential direction is a length considering the time until the movable screen unit 700 decelerates and actually stops. In the present embodiment, since the length of the light-shielding piece 791 has a length of about 50 degrees in the circumferential direction, this is performed in response to the fact that one end of the light-shielding piece 791 in the circumferential direction reaches the optical sensor. Even so, the movable screen unit 700 is placed in a specified position with a margin (for example, a position in which the light-shielding piece 791 is rotated by about 25 degrees in the same direction after one end of the light-shielding piece 791 in the circumferential direction reaches the optical sensor (for example, the light-shielding piece 791). It is possible to control the stop at (almost the center position)). The above-mentioned specified position corresponds to the projection plane origin position described later. Further, if the light-shielding piece 791 does not block the optical sensor when the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 is stopped, the sub-control board 72 determines that the misalignment has occurred and prompts the correction of the misalignment. can. Therefore, even if a trouble such as a misalignment occurs, the misalignment can be corrected immediately, so that it is possible to preferably perform an effect having a higher visual image effect than before.

The above-mentioned specified position is not limited to the central position in the circumferential direction (length direction) of the light-shielding piece 791, but is a position deviated from the central position in the circumferential direction (length direction) of the light-shielding piece 791. There may be.

(7) Explanation of Operation of Movable Screen Unit The operation of the movable screen unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43. FIG. 41 is a view in which the front view and the right side view of the projected block 203 are arranged side by side, and is a view when the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 faces the front. FIG. 42 is a view in which the front view and the right side view of the projected block 203 are arranged side by side, and the end on the long side of the first screen member 712 and the end on the long side of the second screen member 714. It is a figure when the joint part (corner part of a triangular prism) with a part faces the front. FIG. 43 is a view in which the front view and the right side view of the projected block 203 are arranged side by side, and is a view when the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 faces the front.

When the motor 812 (see, for example, FIG. 36) rotates, the large-diameter gear 742 provided on the right base 732 rotates due to the operation of each member constituting the drive mechanism 815, and the movable screen unit 700 rotates around the rotation shaft 722. Rotate.

The sub-control board 72 can operate the movable screen unit 700 according to the gaming state. For example, in a general gaming state (for example, a non-ART gaming state, etc.), the movable screen unit 700 is maintained stopped with the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 facing the front, which is more advantageous than the general gaming state. In a high notification game state (for example, an ART game state), the movable screen unit 700 is maintained stopped with the second screen member 714 facing the front, and the special notification game state has a higher advantage than the notification game state. In (for example, a special zone or the like), the movable screen unit 700 can be kept stopped with the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716 facing the front.

Then, when the gaming state shifts to another gaming state, the sub-control board 72 controls to rotate the movable screen unit 700 so that the projection surface on which the image projected by the projector 213 is projected faces the front. Execute.

When the movable screen unit 700 is rotated, the sub-control board 72 continuously projects the image projected from the projector 213, so that the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 can be visually recognized from the front. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 42, for example, an image projected on both the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 and the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 can be visually recognized.

The sub-control board 72 can project an image corresponding to the projected projection surface (an image corresponding to the game state) as an image projected from the projector 213. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 42, it is advantageous when the image projected on both the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 and the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 can be visually recognized. Images of multiple gaming states with different degrees can be visually recognized at the same time.

Further, the sub-control board 72 is in a gaming state by performing an effect of rattling the movable screen unit 700 (for example, an effect of quickly and repeatedly operating forward rotation and reverse rotation, hereinafter referred to as "rattling effect"). It is possible to perform an effect that makes us expect whether or not the transition will occur. In particular, in the pachi-slot machine of the present embodiment, as described above, the light-shielding piece 791 has a length of about 50 degrees in the circumferential direction. In the case of a triangular prism, it is necessary to rotate the movable screen unit 700 from one projection plane to another projection plane by about 120 degrees. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 can perform the effect of rotating the movable screen unit 700 in the forward and reverse directions within a range of approximately 70 degrees.

For example, when the right end of the shading piece 791 shields the optical sensor 804 from blocking light, both the projection surface 7123 and the projection surface 7141 can be visually recognized from the front, but the projection surface 7141 is better than the projection surface 7123. It is easy to see. Further, when the left end of the light-shielding piece 791 shields the light sensor 802 from blocking light, both the projection surface 7123 and the projection surface 7141 can be visually recognized from the front, but the projection surface 7123 is better than the projection surface 7141. It is easy to see. Therefore, depending on the degree of expectation of transition of the gaming state, the projection plane that is easy to see out of the two projection planes (for example, the projection plane 7123 and the projection plane 7141) is changed to perform a rattling effect, thereby performing a highly interesting effect. be able to. For example, when it is determined that the sub-control board 72 shifts from the general gaming state to the notification gaming state, the sub-control board 72 frequently produces rattling in an angle range in which the projection surface 7141 is easier to see than the projection surface 7123. When it is not decided to shift from the general gaming state to the notification gaming state, the projection surface 7123 is more frequently seen than the projection surface 7141 by performing a rattling effect in an angle range that is easier to see. It is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

By the way, since the image light projected from the projector 213 is reflected and projected on the reflection mirror 237 (see FIG. 7) arranged in the front upper part, it is projected at a predetermined angle toward the projection surface. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 42, when the corners of the triangular prism are facing the front, shadows are likely to be formed according to the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface. In particular, the projection surface 7141 and the projection surface 7167 are remarkable because the projection surface is not flat but has a three-dimensional shape. Further, even when the corners of the triangular pillar do not face the front, since the projection surface has a three-dimensional shape, when the image light projected from the projector 213 is projected on the projection surface, it becomes a shadow. Shadow areas may be formed where the image is not projected. The shadow region formed in this way can occur even if some kind of image light is projected from the projector 213. For example, it may be possible to project image light from the projector 213 so that a shaded area is formed, but the projection surface has a three-dimensional shape of protrusions and recesses, so that such an image is projected from the projector 213. By using the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface without projecting light, it is possible to perform an effect using a shaded area. The effect using the shaded area is, for example, a hidden image effect in which the image showing the expected degree is hidden by projecting the image light indicating the expected degree of the gaming state from the projector 213 to the area where the shaded area is formed. It can be carried out. Then, by performing a rattling effect (step numbers 1 to 50 of the motor sequence table MT15 in FIG. 70 described later) while performing a hidden image effect, it is possible to perform an effect in which an image showing the degree of expectation can be seen or not. It can enhance the interest.

In the present invention, both the terms "projection region" and "projection plane" are used, but both the terms "projection region" and "projection plane" are used in two dimensions and three dimensions. This is to distinguish between. That is, one is a two-dimensional concept, and the other is a three-dimensional concept including a three-dimensional shape. Here, the "projection area" may be two-dimensional and the "projection surface" may be three-dimensional, or the "projection area" may be three-dimensional and the "projection surface" may be two-dimensional. For example, if the "projection area" is "a three-dimensional shape on which the image light projected from the projector 213 is projected", the "projection surface" is "when the image projected from the projector 213 is viewed from the front". It becomes a "two-dimensional image". Further, if the "projection area" is "a two-dimensional image when the image projected from the projector 213 is viewed from the front", the "projection surface" is a solid on which the image projected from the projector 213 is projected. It becomes "shape".

(8) Image example projected on the projection surface 7141 and the projection surface 7167 FIG. 44 is a diagram showing (A) an image example projected on the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and (B) a third screen. It is a figure which shows the image example projected on the projection surface 7161 of a member 716.

In FIG. 44A, since the projection surface 7141 is concave, an image with a sense of depth is projected on the projection surface 7141. Further, in FIG. 44 (B), the book is shaped as a three-dimensional object, and the image projected from the projector 213 projects an image as if the pages of the book are turned over, thereby producing a highly realistic effect. It can be performed.

One of the projection planes (projection planes 7123, 7141, 7167) of the movable screen unit 700, for example, as shown in FIG. 44, even when any of the projection planes including the projection plane 7123 faces the front. ) And the lower screen 7082 of the fixed base 708 form one projection plane. Here, the projection plane of the movable screen unit 700 is variable by rotating the movable screen unit 700 as described above. On the other hand, the lower screen 7082 of the fixed base 708 is a projection plane that can always be projected without operation. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 forms one projection plane on both the projection plane of the movable screen unit 700 (one of the projection planes 7123, 714, 7167) and the lower screen 7082 of the fixed base 708. However, with the lower screen 7082 of the fixed base 708 fixed, it is possible to perform an effect of changing only the projection surface of the movable screen unit 700.

For example, the sub-control board 72 projects an information image that is not related to the result of the internal lottery, such as credit data and BET number display, on the lower screen 7082, and the effect image according to the result of the internal lottery is projected on the projection surface of the movable screen unit 700. It can be projected onto (any of the projection planes 7123, 7141, 7167). Further, the sub-control board 72 may, for example, display the navigation of the push order of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R (see, for example, FIG. 2) on the undulating portion of the lower screen 7082 that functions as a fixed screen. In this way, by using the projection surface of the movable screen unit 700 and the lower screen 7082 that functions as a fixed screen, the information image is always projected while changing the projected image according to the progress of the game. can do. For example, in the case of a liquid crystal display, unlike the movable screen unit 700 of the present embodiment, it does not rotate, so that it is possible to constantly display an information image by display control. However, in the case of a movable screen unit 700 such as the present embodiment in which the projection surface moves and changes due to rotation, it is difficult to maintain the information image in an easily visible mode. In this regard, as in the present embodiment, the lower screen 7082 of the fixed base 708 is formed while the projection plane of the movable screen unit 700 and the lower screen 7082 of the fixed base 708 form one projection plane. By changing only the projection surface of the movable screen unit 700 in a fixed state, it is possible to maintain the information image in an easily visible mode while changing the effect image.

It should be noted that while the effect image according to the result of the internal lottery is projected on both the projection surface of the movable screen unit 700 and the lower screen 7082, the information image not related to the result of the internal lottery is projected only on the lower screen 7082. Alternatively, both the effect image according to the result of the internal lottery and the information image not related to the result of the internal lottery may be projected on both the projection surface of the movable screen unit 700 and the lower screen 7082. ..

<Front panel>
FIG. 45 is a front view of the front panel 500 of the second embodiment, and FIG. 46 is a perspective view seen from above on the right side thereof. As shown in FIGS. 45 and X + 1, the front panel 500 is provided with a display device cover 30 on the front side of the front panel 500, and a front effect is provided in the area behind the display device cover 30 (inside the pachislot machine). A unit 900 is provided.

The configuration of the front effect unit 900 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. FIG. 47 is a front view of the front effect unit 900. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the front effect unit 900.

The front effect unit 900 has a left side light effect unit 900L, a right side light effect unit 900R, and a bottom plate 904. The bottom plate 904 has a plate shape that is long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is arranged so that the upper and lower surfaces are flat. The left side light effect unit 900L and the right side light effect unit 900R are erected substantially vertically upward at both ends of the bottom plate 904 in the longitudinal direction.

Further, a left mounting member 905L is fixed to the upper end of the left light effect unit 900L, and a right mounting member 905R is fixed to the upper end of the right light effect unit 900R. A cover 906 is attached to the bottom plate 904 from below.

As described above, the front effect unit 900 is configured as a substantially U-shape, and the opening 10a of the front panel 500 (for example, FIGS. 2, 4, 4) is formed from the back surface of the front door 2a (see, for example, FIG. 2). It is installed so as to face (see 49). Note that FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 45.

(1) Right-side light effect unit The configuration of the right-side light effect unit 900R will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 57. Although there is a difference in the number of light guide plates between the left side light effect unit 900L and the right side light effect unit 900R, the configuration is almost the same. Will be briefly described later. 50 and 51 are exploded perspective views of the right side light effect unit 900R, and the viewing directions are different between FIGS. 50 and 51. FIG. 52 is a front view of the right light effect unit 900R. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the light guide plate 911, the light guide plate cover 936, and the LED substrate 922 (all of which will be described later). FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the LED substrate 922, the light guide plate cover 936, and the light guide plate 911. Further, FIG. 55 is a sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 52. FIG. 56 is a perspective view showing a state in which the LED substrate 922 and the right light guide plate subunit 910R are assembled. FIG. 57 is a perspective view of the right-hand light effect unit 900R as seen from the direction of arrow 990 in FIG. 55.

The right light effect unit 900R realizes a predetermined light effect on the right side of the front panel 500 (see, for example, FIG. 45), and includes an LED substrate 922 on which a large number of LEDs 921 are arranged and a lens 928 described later. It includes a right-side lens subunit 912R in which light emission effect is performed through the light guide plate 911 R, and a right-hand light guide plate subunit 910R in which light emission effect is performed by a light guide plate 911 described later.

In the right light effect unit 900R, the right light guide plate subunit 910R is tilted with respect to the right lens sub unit 912R, and the right light guide plate subunit 910R and the right lens sub unit 912R overlap when viewed from the player's line of sight. (See, for example, FIGS. 49 and 55). Since the right light guide plate subunit 910R is arranged on the player side, the right lens sub unit 912R can be visually recognized behind the right light guide plate subunit 910R.

The right light guide plate subunit 910R and the right lens subunit 912R are unitized by using the same LED substrate 922.

(1-1) LED board For example, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 53 to 57, the LED board 922 has a rectangular shape, so that the LEDs arranged on the LED board 922 face the front of the pachi-slot machine. Be placed. That is, the LED substrate 922 is arranged so that the surface on which the LED is arranged is along a two-dimensional surface including the left-right direction and the vertical direction in the front view (so as to face each other in the front view).

Further, the LED substrate 922 is provided with a large number of LEDs 921 arranged on the surface thereof for each system (details will be described later). The LED substrate 922 is housed in the LED substrate cover 920 that covers the back surface side.

As shown in FIG. 53, in the LED substrate 922, the LED 921 for guiding the light to the right lens subunit 912R is arranged in the right region 9222 from the right side to the left side in the front view to about 2/3, and the rest. In the left side region 9224, an LED 921 for guiding light to the right light guide plate subunit 910R is arranged. The right side region 9222 has LED rows of the first row 923A, the second row 923B, and the third row 923C from the right side to the left side of the front view, and the left side region 9224 has the LED rows from the right side to the left side of the front view. It has LED rows of 4th row 923D, 5th row 923E, and 6th row 923F toward the direction of.

(1-2) Right Lens Subunit As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the right lens subunit 912R has three light guide lenses 924 (right column) that conduct light from the LED 921 arranged on the LED substrate 922. The light guide lens 924A, middle row light guide lens 924B, left row light guide lens 924C) and each light guide lens 924A, 924B so as to suppress the leakage of light conducting through these light guide lenses 924A, 924B, 924C. A light guide lens reflector 926 capable of accommodating 924C and a lens 928 in which three lenses 928A, 928B, and 928C having a substantially semicircular cross section and hollow cylinders are adjacently arranged in a stepped manner and integrated are inserted. It is provided with a lens base 930 and a support.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the three light guide lenses 924, the right row light guide lens 924A faces the LED 921 arranged in the first row 923A of the LED substrate 922 (more specifically, the trabecular body 925A described later). (Facing the LED 921), the middle row light guide lens 924B faces the LED 921 arranged in the second row 923B of the LED substrate 922 (more specifically, the small pillar body 925B described later faces the LED 921), and the left row light guide The lens 924C is arranged so as to face the LED 921 arranged in the first row 923A (FIG. 52) of the LED substrate 922 (more specifically, the small column 925C described later faces the LED 921).

Further, a plurality of columnar small pillars 925A extending toward the LED substrate 922 are formed in the right row light guide lens 924A along the longitudinal direction, and the middle row light guide lens 924B extends toward the LED substrate 922. A plurality of columnar small pillars 925B are formed along the longitudinal direction, and a plurality of columnar small pillars 925C extending toward the LED substrate 922 are formed on the left column light guide lens 924C along the longitudinal direction. .. Here, since the lens 928 has three lenses 928A, 928B, and 928C arranged side by side in a stepped manner adjacent to each other, the shortest length (horizontal) from each prism 925A, 925B, 925C to the LED substrate 922. It is a directional length, hereinafter simply referred to as "length"), but differs depending on each lens 928.

For example, in the right-row light guide lens 924A arranged corresponding to the right-row lens 928A farthest from the LED substrate 922, the prism body 925A has a length of another light guide lens 924B, 924C. , Larger than 925C, the light from the LED 921 can be conducted to the prism 925A and guided to the immediate vicinity of the back surface of the right column lens 928A. Further, the left-row light guide lens 924C arranged corresponding to the left-row lens 928C closest to the LED substrate 922 has a small pillar body 925A, 925B of which the length of the small pillar body 925C is another light guide lens 924A, 924B. It is smaller, and the light from the LED 921 can be conducted to the prism 925C and guided to the immediate vicinity of the back surface of the left column lens 928C. Further, in the middle row light guide lens 924B arranged corresponding to the middle row lens 928B, the length of the columnar body 925B is smaller than that of the right row light guide lens 924A but larger than that of the left row light guide lens 924C. The light from the LED 921 can be conducted to the columnar body 925C and guided to the immediate vicinity of the back surface of the middle-row lens 928B.

The light from the LED 921 arranged on the LED substrate 922 conducts through the light guide lenses 924A, 924B, 924C and is emitted from the lenses 928A, 928B, 928C. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 55, the right column lens. The 928A emits light at the position farthest from the LED substrate 922 (the position on the frontmost side), the left-row lens 928C emits light at the position closest to the LED substrate 922 (the position on the rearmost side), and the middle-row lens 928B emits light in the middle. It will emit light at the position of.

By the way, by arranging a plurality of lenses 928 in parallel in a staircase pattern, the light emitting positions of the respective lenses 928A, 928B, and 928C can be changed, but on the other hand, there is a possibility that the light emitting intensity may vary. That is, light is supplied to the lens 928 from the LED substrate 922, but since the light is attenuated according to the distance from the LED substrate 922 to the lens 928, the right column having the largest length from the LED substrate 922. The light emission amount of the lens 928A may decrease, and an imbalance may occur in the light emission intensity between the respective lenses 928.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the light guide lenses 924A, 924B, 924C are interposed between the respective lenses 928A, 928B, 928C and the LED substrate 922, and the light guide lenses 924A, 924B, 924C are LEDs. The light emitted from the LED 921 arranged on the substrate 922 is taken in and guided to the vicinity of the back surface of each lens 928A, 928B, 928C to be emitted. In this way, while suppressing the attenuation of light by the light guide lenses 924A, 924B, 924C, the emitted light from the LED 921 arranged on the LED substrate 922 is guided to the vicinity of the back surface of each lens 928A, 928B, 928C. Therefore, even if the light emitting position of the lens 928 is far from the LED922 substrate, the light emitting intensity is not lowered. As a result, it is possible to emit light having substantially uniform emission intensities at positions different in length from the LED substrate 922, even though the LED substrate 922 has a common light emission source. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 50, in the light guide lens reflector 926, the right row light guide lens 924A, the middle row light guide lens 924B, and the left row light guide lens 924C are arranged in this order from the right side surface of the LED substrate 922. Each light guide lens is accommodated so as to be arranged so as to face the LED substrate 922.

In the lens base 930, the lens 928 covers the light guide lens reflector 926 and fixes them. Further, in the lens base 930, the end faces of the light guide lenses 924A, 924B, 924C are located near the back surface of the lenses 928A, 928B, 928C while the light guide lenses 924A, 924B, and 924C face the LED substrate 922. I am doing it. Each lens 928A, 928B, 928C is engraved with a pattern as if a plurality of sine waves are overlapped, and when the LED 921 emits light, the pattern corresponding to the emission color can be visually recognized through the light guide plate 911. can.

(1-3) Right light guide plate subunit As shown in FIGS. 53 and 55, the right light guide plate subunit 910R includes a plurality of light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C on top of each other. The right light guide plate subunit 910R guides each of the light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C when viewed from the front of the pachislot machine while facing the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side to the LED substrate 922. The flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C are placed on the LED substrate 922 from the rear to the front so that the optical plates 911A, 911B, 911C and the lens 928 can be seen overlapping. It is tilted so that it spreads outward (on the right side when viewed from the front).

In this way, by inclining each flat surface 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 with respect to the LED substrate 922, the light guide plate 911 and the lens 928 use the same LED substrate 922 as a light emitting source. The lens 928 is made visible through each of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the 911, so that a mixed effect of the respective light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C and the lens 928 is provided.

In the present embodiment, the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 are inclined with respect to the LED substrate 922, but the light source is not an LED but the light is diffused as compared with the LED such as a lamp. In the case of a light source, it is preferable to incline each flat surface 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 with respect to a virtual two-dimensional surface where the light of each lamp is most concentrated in a plurality of lamps. Further, even if the light source is an LED, when the LED is inclined with respect to the LED substrate, the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 are inclined with respect to the LED substrate. Instead, it is preferable to incline the plurality of LEDs with respect to the virtual two-dimensional surface where the light of each LED is most concentrated. However, although the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 are inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 921, they are taken in from the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the proximal end side (entry). It is almost parallel to the traveling direction of the (shining) light.

Further, the light guide plate 911 forms irregularities on each flat surface 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 in a predetermined shape, pattern, character, etc., and transmits light from the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side along the surface. By making it (for example, when the LED 921 is lit), the above-mentioned predetermined shapes, patterns, characters, etc. appear on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3. In the present embodiment, a non-transparent treatment is performed on a specific portion of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 by depositing a non-transparent material (for example, a silver metal color foil) by hot stamping, for example. ing. As a result, when the LEDs 921 arranged to face each side surface 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side of the light guide plate 911 are turned on, the non-transmissive region where the hot stamping foil exists is three-dimensionally formed by the light transmitting region around the LED 921. At the same time, it is possible to create a conspicuously raised aspect.

It should be noted that "when the LED 921 is lit, the above-mentioned predetermined shapes, patterns, characters, etc. appear on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3" means that the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 are normally used (for example, when the LED 921 is turned off). Nothing appears in the above, and the present invention is not limited to the mode in which a predetermined shape, pattern, characters, etc. appear on each of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 at a specific time (for example, when the LED 921 is lit). For example, even in a normal time, the above-mentioned predetermined shape, pattern, character, etc. can be visually recognized by the incoming light of ambient light, and the above-mentioned predetermined shape, pattern, character, etc. can be visually recognized more clearly at a specific time. It also includes aspects such as being able to do it.

Further, in the present embodiment, predetermined shapes, patterns, characters, etc. are formed on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a transparent paint, a transparent member, or the like is formed. Although it is almost invisible in normal times, the image may be visible at a specific time.

Further, the "image" generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present specification, an image displayed indirectly or directly by a light source such as an LED is also used. Called "image". Therefore, by transmitting light from the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side of the light guide plate 911 along the surface, predetermined shapes, patterns, characters, etc. appearing on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 are also included in the image. Is done.

Further, in the present embodiment, the impermeable treatment is performed by using the hot stamping foil. Instead, for example, when a thin colored metal is vapor-deposited, the portion where the metal is vapor-deposited is illuminated. It is also possible to configure the light transmission region so that the light of the LED that transmits the metal and the light that transmits the light guide plate 911 exist.

As shown in FIGS. 50 and 53, the light guide plate cover 936 accommodates three light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C, and each side surface 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side of each light guide plate 911 is an LED substrate. It faces 922. The side surface 911A1 on the base end side of the first light guide plate 911A faces the fourth row 923D of the LED substrate 922, and the side surface 911B1 on the base end side of the second light guide plate 911B faces the fifth row 923E. The side surface 911C1 on the base end side of the light guide plate 911C faces the sixth row 923F. In this way, while the plurality of light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C overlap each other, the light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C are directed from the proximal end side to the other end side (hereinafter referred to as "anti-base end side"). By inclining the LED 921 so as to be separated from the LED substrate 922, the pattern appearing on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the respective light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C when the LED 921 arranged on the LED substrate 922 is lit is seen by the player. It will be visually recognized with parallax (deviation) from the viewpoint, and it will be possible to produce a three-dimensional effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 53, the flat surface 911A3 of the first light guide plate 911A has a first circular opening 9112A on the upper end side and the proximal end side and a second circular opening on the upper end side and the anti-base end side. The holes 9114A are formed with a third circular opening 9116A on the lower end side and the proximal end side, and a fourth circular opening 9118A on the lower end side and the anti-base end side, respectively. Further, on the flat surface 911B3 of the second light guide plate 911B, a first circular opening 9112B is provided on the upper end side and the base end side, and a second circular opening 9114B is provided on the upper end side and the opposite base end side. A third circular opening 9116B is formed on the end side, and a fourth circular opening 9118B is formed on the lower end and the opposite base end side. Similarly, on the flat surface 911C3 of the third light guide plate 911C, a first circular opening 9112C is provided on the upper end side and the proximal end side, and a second circular opening 9114C is provided on the upper end side and the opposite proximal end side. A third circular opening 9116C is formed on the proximal end side, and a fourth circular opening 9118C is formed on the lower end and the opposite proximal end side.

Further, a locking member (upper locking member 938, which connects the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C to the upper end and the lower end of the light guide plate cover 936 with their respective flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 facing each other. The lower locking member 940) is attached. The upper locking member 938 is formed with a protrusion member 9382 on the proximal end side and a projection member 9384 on the anti-base end side, and the lower locking member 930 has a projection member 9402 on the proximal end side and the anti-base end side. The protrusion member 9404 is formed.

Then, the protrusion member 9382 on the base end side formed on the upper locking member 938 penetrates the first circular openings 9112A, 9112B, 9112C, respectively, and the protrusion member on the anti-base end side formed on the upper locking member 938. By passing the 9384 through the second circular openings 9114A, 9114B, 9114C, the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C are connected at the upper end. Similarly, the protrusion member 9402 on the proximal end side formed on the lower locking member 940 penetrates the third circular opening 9116A, 9116B, 9116C, respectively, and the protrusion on the anti-base end side formed on the lower locking member 940. The three light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C are connected at the lower end by the member 9404 penetrating each of the fourth circular openings 9118A, 9118B, 9118C. The three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C connected in this way are fixed to the light guide plate cover 936. When connecting the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C, a decorative cover 942 that functions as a decorative plate of the right light effect unit 900R is also attached to the surface (player) side of the light guide plate 911.

The protrusion members 9382, 9384, 9402, and 9404 have substantially the same length regardless of whether they are on the proximal end side or the anti-base end side. In this way, by making the protrusion members 9382, 9384, 9402, and 9404 penetrating the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C substantially the same, the distance between the light guide plates (horizontal length to the opposite light guide plates) can be set. Regardless, it can be suppressed to a certain length range. However, the protrusion members 9382, 9384, 9402, and 9404 do not necessarily have to have substantially the same length. For example, the length of the protrusion member 9382 on the proximal end side and the length of the projection member 9384 on the opposite proximal end side are different. Similarly, the length of the protrusion member 9402 on the proximal end side and the length of the projection member 9404 on the opposite proximal end side may be different.

The upper and lower ends of the light guide plate cover 936 are connected to the lens base 930 by a cover mounting member 923, 934 (see, for example, FIG. 50), and the light guide plate 911 and the lens 928 are integrally opposed to the LED substrate 922. Be placed.

By the way, when each side surface 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side of the light guide plate 911 is perpendicular to each flat surface 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911, the LED 921 and the light guide plate 911 arranged on the LED substrate 922 A predetermined angle is generated between the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side of the LED 921, and the light from the LED 921 cannot sufficiently enter the light guide plate 911.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the side surfaces 911A1,911B1,911C1 on the base end side of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are cut so as to form a surface facing the LED 921 arranged on the LED substrate 922. As a result, the light emitted from the LED 921 is configured to be incident substantially perpendicular to the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the proximal end side.

By the way, if the light incident on each of the light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C is diffused without going straight, there is a problem that the image that should appear on each of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 does not appear clearly. May occur. In this respect, in the present embodiment, each of the above-mentioned flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 is cut so that a surface facing the LED 921 is formed. As a result, the straightness of the light incident on the light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C can be increased, and the light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C are inclined with respect to the LED substrate 922, while the light guide plates 911 are flat. It is possible to make the image clearly appear on the surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 49 and 57, an open region is formed between the lens 928 and the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C on the side opposite to the LED substrate 922 side. 980 is formed. Then, in this open area 980, various light effects can be performed.

The inner wall (reflecting member) 914L, 914R (see, for example, FIGS. 45 and 46) of the side covers 903L and 903R of the front panel 500 are inclined in the same direction as the inclination direction of the light guide plate on the front side of the LED substrate 922. It is possible to function as a reflective surface that has been mirror-finished. That is, when the light emitted from the LED 921 arranged on the LED substrate 922 enters the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 of the light guide plate 911, the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 are preliminarily applied. Images such as patterns and characters appear. The image appearing on each of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 is reflected by the inner surface wall 914R functioning as a reflecting surface and reaches the player's field of view. A part of the light emitted from the lens 928 is also reflected and reaches the player's field of view. In this case, the player directly visually recognizes the light emitted from the lens 928 and / or the image appearing on each of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911, and visually recognizes the image reflected by the inner surface wall 914R and the like. In combination with what you do, you can make yourself aware of the double image of light.

Further, the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, 911C2 on the anti-base end side of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C, respectively, are not perpendicular to the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911, but are flat. The surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 are cut so that the angle formed between the front and back surfaces (the surface on the player side) is an acute angle (see, for example, FIG. 55). As described above, since the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side are also cut, the cross section seen when these light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C are cut in the horizontal direction is shown in FIG. 55, for example. Of the front and back surfaces of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3, the back surface (the surface on the lens 928 side) is the upper bottom, and the front surface (the surface on the player side) is the lower bottom.

In this way, between the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, 911C2 of the light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C on the anti-base end side and the front surface (the surface on the player side) of the front and back surfaces of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3. By cutting so that the angle formed by the light guide plate 911 is sharp, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the light emitted from each side surface 911A2, 911B2, 911C2 on the anti-base end side of the light guide plate 911 (player). From the side, it can only be recognized as a linear shape along the end on the opposite base end side of each flat surface 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911), and the player's consciousness is the flat surface 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911. You can gaze at the images that appear. On the other hand, for a third party who is not a party to the game of the pachislot, it is expected that the pachislot will be in an advantageous state, for example, by using the light emitted from each side surface 911A2, 911B2, 911C2 of the light guide plate 911. It is possible to appeal that it is in a high degree state. In particular, when a plurality of light guide plates 911 are brought close to each other so that the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, 911C2 on the anti-base end side are substantially flush with each other, the light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C are located on the anti-base end side. Since the thickness of each side surface 911A2, 911B2, 911C2 becomes thick and thick light is emitted, it is possible to strongly appeal to the above-mentioned third party. Further, since the light emitted from the lens 928 can be visually recognized even in the open region 980, the effect is great. In particular, in a game machine in which the effect image is displayed by projecting the image light projected from the projector 213, it is necessary to make the vicinity of the screen a dark place because the projected image becomes blurred when the vicinity of the screen is brightened. Then, it becomes difficult to provide a light emitting means in the vicinity of the screen, and the appeal to a third party tends to be weakened, so that the effect is remarkable.

When a plurality of light guide plates are stacked and arranged as in the present embodiment, the ends of the light guide plates on the opposite side to the base end side are cut at the same angle so that the end portions can be visually recognized. It is preferable in that it has a strong appeal to a third party who can do it, but it is not always limited to this. For example, when a light guide plate cut at one angle and a light guide plate cut at another angle are placed on top of each other, a person who is in a range where the end of the light guide plate cut at one angle can be visually recognized. And, it is possible to appeal to both a person who is in a visible range at the end of the light guide plate cut at another angle, and the range that can be appealed to a third party is widened.

Further, in the present embodiment, each side surface 911A2, 911B2, 911C2 on the anti-base end side of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C is provided on the front surface (player side) of the front and back surfaces of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3. It is cut so that the angle formed with the surface) is an acute angle, but instead of this, it may be cut so that it has an obtuse angle. In this case, the light emission from the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, 911C2 on the opposite base end side of the light guide plate 911 can be visually recognized from the player side, and the images appearing on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911. Together with this, it is possible to create a production that enhances the interest of the player.

Further, the emission color of the light emitted from each side surface 911A2, 911B2, 911C2 on the anti-base end side of the light guide plate 911 can be arbitrarily determined, but if the emission color is set to a warm color or a rainbow color, it becomes more It is possible to further enhance the interest of the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53, among the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C, for the third light guide plate 911C, each LED 921 arranged on the side surface 911A1 on the base end side and in the sixth row 923F. A projecting body 956 for guiding light is provided to allow light from the light to enter. The protruding body 956 has a comb-teeth shape corresponding to the arrangement pitch of the LEDs in the sixth row 923F.

As shown in FIG. 56, each of the light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C is housed in the light guide plate cover 936, and the LED substrate is such that the projecting body 956 and the LED 921 arranged on the LED substrate 922 face each other. It is assembled with 922. The light guide plate cover 936 is provided with a partition wall 937 that partitions each projecting body 956, and the partition wall 937 prevents the light emitted from the LED 921 facing the adjacent projecting bodies 956 from entering. It has a function. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light entering from the projecting body 956 of the third light guide plate 911C from mixing with each other among the plurality of LEDs 921. Further, since the projecting body 956 for the light guide plate and the light guide plate 911C are integrally molded, the light entering region to the light guide plate (for example, as compared with the one separately from the light guide plate such as a diffusion lens). , The region of α shown in FIG. 54) can be reduced, and the effect region of the light guide plate 911C (for example, the region of β shown in FIG. 54) can be increased accordingly.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55, when the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are arranged in an overlapping manner, the space between one light guide plate and another adjacent light guide plate is set on the base end side (LED substrate). It is widest on the 922 side) and gradually narrows toward the anti-base end side (the side opposite to the LED substrate 922).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53, the first circle on the surface of the front and back surfaces of the flat surface 911A3 of the first light guide plate 911A facing the second light guide plate 911B (player side). The first rib 9113A, the second rib 9115A, respectively, on the peripheral edge of the opening 9112A, the peripheral edge of the second circular opening 9114A, the peripheral edge of the third circular opening 9116A, and the peripheral edge of the fourth circular opening 9118A, respectively. A third rib 9117A and a fourth rib 9119A are provided. Each of these ribs 9113A, 9115A, 9117A, 9119A has an inclined surface that is inclined downward from the proximal end side toward the anti-base end side (see, for example, FIG. 55).

Similarly, on the surface of the front and back surfaces of the flat surface 911B3 of the second light guide plate 911B facing the third light guide plate 911C (player side), the peripheral portion of the first circular opening 9112B, the second circle. The first rib 9113B, the second rib 9115B, the third rib 9117B, and the fourth rib 9119B are provided on the peripheral edge of the opening 9114B, the peripheral edge of the third circular opening 9116B, and the peripheral edge of the fourth circular opening 9118B, respectively. It is provided. Each of these ribs 9113B, 9115B, 9117B, 9119B has an inclined surface that is inclined downward from the proximal end side toward the anti-base end side (see, for example, FIG. 55).

When the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are connected, the ribs 9113A, 9115A, 9117A, and 9119A provided on the first light guide plate 911A have flat surfaces 911B3 of the second light guide plate 911B facing each other. Contact with. Similarly, the ribs 9113B, 9115B, 9117B, 9119B provided on the second light guide plate 911B abut on the flat surface 911C3 of the facing third light guide plate 911C. In this way, when the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are connected to the flat surfaces of the light guide plates facing each other with the ribs in contact with each other and then fixed to the light guide plate cover 936, the flat surfaces of the light guide plates are connected to each other. The space is widest on the base end side and gradually narrows toward the anti-base end side.

In this way, by making the space between the flat surfaces of the light guide plates widest on the proximal end side, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LEDs 921 arranged in the adjacent row from entering. For example, the light emitted from the LED 921 arranged in the fourth row 923D enters the side surface 911A1 on the base end side of the first light guide plate 911A, and is arranged in, for example, the third row 923C or the fifth row 923E. It is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LED 921 from entering. In addition, by narrowing the space between the flat surfaces of the light guide plate on the anti-base end side, the light emitted from the side surface of the light guide plate can be thickened, and the appeal to a third party can be enhanced. can. Further, since the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are connected to the light guide plates facing each other by abutting the ribs and fixed to the light guide plate cover 936, the stability when transporting the pastillo is improved. It exerts the effect of being excellent.

The space between one light guide plate and another adjacent light guide plate should be widest on the proximal end side (LED substrate 922 side), and on the anti-base end side (opposite to the LED substrate 922). The mode in which the LED is gradually narrowed toward the direction is not limited to the above mode in which the rib having an inclined surface that inclines downward from the proximal end side to the opposite proximal end side is provided. For example, a boss on the proximal end side and a boss on the anti-base end side are provided on the flat surface 911A3 of the first light guide plate 911A on the side facing the second light guide plate 911B, and the boss on the anti-base end side is more base than the boss on the anti-base end side. The height of the boss on the end side (the shortest distance to the flat surface of the facing second light guide plate 911B) may be increased. Similarly, a boss on the proximal end side and a boss on the anti-base end side are provided on the flat surface 911B3 of the second light guide plate 911B on the side facing the third light guide plate 911C, and the boss on the anti-base end side is more than the boss on the anti-base end side. The height of the boss on the base end side may be increased. Further, of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C, the flat surface of the first light guide plate 911A on the side facing the second light guide plate 911B is inclined downward from the proximal end side toward the anti-base end side. A rib having an inclined surface is provided, and the flat surface of the second light guide plate 911B on the side facing the third light guide plate 911C is smaller in height than the boss on the proximal end side and the boss on the proximal end side. A boss on the anti-base end side may be provided.

(2) Left Light Effect Unit The left light effect unit 900L will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60. 58 is a front view of the left light effect unit 900L, FIG. 59 is a sectional view taken along line DD of FIG. 58, and FIG. 60 is a light guide plate 1911, a light guide plate cover 1936, and an LED substrate 1922 (all of which are). It is an exploded perspective view (which will be described later).

As described above, the configuration of the left light effect unit 900L is substantially the same as that of the right side light effect unit 900R, and therefore, a brief description thereof will be given here.

The left side light effect unit 900L realizes a predetermined light effect together with the right side light effect unit 900R on the left side of the front panel 500 (see, for example, FIG. 45), and is an LED substrate 1922 in which a large number of LEDs are arranged. The left lens subunit subunit 912L, in which light emission effect is performed via the lens 1928, and the left light guide plate subunit 910L, in which light emission effect is performed by the light guide plate 1911 described later, are provided.

(2-1) LED board The LED board 1922 has a rectangular shape like the LED board 922, and the LEDs arranged on the LED board 1922 are arranged so as to face the front of the pachi-slot machine. That is, the LED substrate 1922 is arranged so that the surface on which the LED is arranged is along a two-dimensional surface including the left-right direction and the vertical direction in the front view (so as to face each other in the front view).

Further, the LED substrate 1922 is provided with a large number of LEDs arranged on the surface thereof for each system. The LED substrate 1922 is housed in an LED substrate cover (not shown) that covers the back surface side.

Further, the LED substrate 1922 has an LED row in which LEDs (not shown) are arranged in the vertical direction like the LED substrate 922, but the number of rows is one row smaller than that of the LED substrate 922. .. This is because the number of light guide plates 1911 described later is one less.

The other configurations of the LED board 1922 are substantially the same as those of the LED board 922, and the description thereof will be omitted.

(2-2) Left lens sub-unit The left lens sub-unit 912L has three light guide lenses 1924 (left row light guide lens 1924A, middle row light guide lens 1924B) that conduct light from LEDs arranged on the LED substrate 1922. , Right column light guide lens 1924C) and the light guide lens reflector 1926 that can accommodate each light guide lens 1924A, 1924B, 1924C so as to suppress the leakage of light conducting the light guide lenses 1924A, 1924B, 1924C. A lens 1928 in which three lenses 1928A, 1928B, and 1928C having a substantially semicircular cross section and hollow cylinders are adjacently arranged in a stepped manner and integrated, and a lens base 1930 that inserts and supports them are provided. ..

Each of the three light guide lenses 1924 is arranged so as to face the LEDs arranged in the LED row of the LED substrate 1922.

Further, each of the row light guide lenses 1924A, 1924B, and 1924C is formed with a plurality of columnar small pillars (not shown) extending toward the LED substrate 1922 along the longitudinal direction. Here, since the lens 1928 has three lenses 1928A, 1928B, and 1928C arranged side by side in a stepped manner adjacent to each other, it is the shortest length (horizontal length) from each columnar body to the LED substrate 1922. , Hereinafter referred to simply as "length"), but differ depending on each lens 1928. It should be noted that these prisms can conduct the light from the LED 1921 to each prism and guide the light to the immediate vicinity of the back surface of each lens 1928.

The light from the LEDs arranged on the LED substrate 1922 conducts the light guide lenses 1924A, 1924B, 1924C and is emitted from the lenses 1928A, 1928B, 1928C, so that the left column lens 1928A is the farthest from the LED substrate 1922. The right-row lens 1928C emits light at the position (most front position), the right-row lens 1928C emits light at the position closest to the LED substrate 1922 (the rearmost position), and the middle-row lens 1928B emits light at an intermediate position. ..

Similar to the right lens subsystem 912R, the light emitting lenses 1924A, 1924B, 1924C suppress the light attenuation, and the emitted light from the LED arranged on the LED substrate 1922 is emitted from the respective lenses 1928A, 1928B, 1928C. By guiding to the vicinity of the back surface, the light emission intensity does not decrease even if the light emission position of the lens 1928 is far from the LED substrate. As a result, it is possible to emit light having substantially uniform emission intensities at positions different in length from the LED substrate 1922, even though the light emission source is one LED substrate in common.

Further, the light guide lenses 1924A, 1924B, and 1924C are also housed in the light guide lens reflector 1926.

In the lens base 1930, the lens 1928 covers the light guide lens reflector 1926 and fixes them. Further, in the lens base 1930, the end faces of the light guide lenses 1924A, 1924B, 1924C are located near the back surface of the lenses 1928A, 1928B, 1928C while the light guide lenses 1924A, 1924B, 1924C face the LED substrate 1922. I am doing it. Each lens 1928A, 1928B, 1928C is engraved with a pattern as if a plurality of sine waves are overlapped, and when the LED emits light, the pattern corresponding to the emission color can be visually recognized through the light guide plate 1911. can.

(2-3) Left light guide plate subunit The left light guide plate subunit 910L includes a plurality of light guide plates 1911A and 1911B on top of each other. The left light guide plate subunit 910L has light guide plates 1911A and 1911B, respectively, when viewed from the front of the pachi-slot machine while facing the side surfaces 1911A1 and 1911B1 on the base end side of the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B to the LED substrate 1922. The flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are spread out from the rear to the front of the LED substrate 1922 toward the outside of the pachislot (left side when viewed from the front) so that the lens 1928 and the lens 1928 appear to overlap each other. It is arranged at an angle.

In this way, by inclining the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 with respect to the LED substrate 1922, the light guide plate 1911 and the lens 1928 use the same LED substrate 1922 as a light emitting source, and the light guide plate 1911 The lens 1928 is made visible through the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 so that the mixed effect of the respective light guide plates 1911A and 1911B and the lens 1928 is provided.

The flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 are also inclined with respect to the LED substrate 1922, but when the light source is not an LED but a light source such as a lamp in which light is diffused as compared with the LED. It is preferable to incline each flat surface 1911A3, 1911B3, 1911C3 of the light guide plate 1911 with respect to a virtual two-dimensional surface where the light of each lamp is most concentrated in a plurality of lamps. Further, even if the light source is an LED, if the LEDs are arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the LED substrate, the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 may be inclined with respect to the LED substrate. Instead, it is preferable to incline the plurality of LEDs with respect to the virtual two-dimensional surface where the light of each LED is most concentrated. However, although the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 are inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED, the light taken in (entered) from the side surfaces 1911A1 and 1911B1 on the proximal end side. It is almost parallel to the traveling direction of.

Further, the light guide plate 1911 forms irregularities on each of the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 in a predetermined shape, pattern, character, etc., and allows light to pass along the surface from the end portion, for example, when the LED is lit. The engraved predetermined shapes, patterns, characters, etc. are made to appear on the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3. In the present embodiment, a non-transparent treatment is performed on a specific portion of the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 by depositing a non-transparent material (for example, a silver metal color foil) by, for example, hot stamping. .. As a result, when the LEDs arranged facing each other on the side surfaces 1911A1 and 1911B1 on the base end side of the light guide plate 1911 are turned on, the non-transmissive region where the hot stamping foil exists is three-dimensionally and by the light transmissive region around it. It is possible to create a distinctly raised aspect.

In addition, "when the LED is lit, a predetermined shape, pattern, characters, etc. engraved appear on each flat surface 1911A3, 1911B3, 1911C3" means that in normal times (for example, when the LED is turned off), it is on each flat surface 1911A3, 1911B3. Nothing appears, and the present invention is not limited to the mode in which a predetermined shape, pattern, character, or the like appears on each of the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 at a specific time (for example, when the LED is lit). For example, even in normal times, the engraved predetermined shapes, patterns, characters, etc. can be visually recognized by the incoming light of ambient light, and the engraved predetermined shapes, patterns, characters, etc. can be made clearer at specific times. It also includes aspects such as being able to be visually recognized.

Further, in the present embodiment, a predetermined shape, pattern, characters, etc. are engraved on each light guide plate 1911, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an image is usually composed of a transparent paint, a transparent member, or the like. Although it is almost invisible at the time, the image may be visible at a specific time.

Further, the shapes, patterns, characters, etc. formed on the flat surfaces 1911A3, 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 are different from the shapes, patterns, characters, etc. formed on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911. Therefore, when the LED is turned on, different images appear on the flat surfaces 1911A3, 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911, although they have the same motif as the images appearing on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911.

However, the image appearing on the flat surfaces 1911A3, 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 when the LED is turned on may be the same as the image appearing on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911.

Further, in the present embodiment, for any of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 and the flat surfaces 1911A3, 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911, a specific portion is subjected to, for example, hot stamping to a non-transparent material (for example, silver color). The non-transmissive treatment for depositing (metal color foil) is performed, but it is not always necessary to perform the non-transparent treatment on the flat surfaces of all the light guide plates, and only the flat surfaces of some light guide plates are non-transparent. Transparency processing may be performed.

The light guide plate cover 1936 accommodates two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B, and each side surface 1911A1 and 1911B1 on the proximal end side of each light guide plate 1911 faces the LED substrate 1922. Further, the plurality of light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are inclined so as to be separated from the LED substrate 1922 from the proximal end side to the anti-base end side of the respective light guide plates 1911A and 1911B while overlapping with each other, thereby causing the LED substrate 1922. When the LEDs arranged in the above are lit, the patterns appearing on the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are visually recognized with parallax (deviation) from the player's point of view, resulting in a three-dimensional effect. It will be possible.

Further, the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B have circles on the upper end side and the base end side, the upper end side and the anti-base end side, the lower end side and the base end side, and the lower end and the anti-base end side, respectively. The openings 19112A, 19114A, 19116A, 19118A, 19112B, 19114B, 19116B, 19118B are formed.

Then, the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are connected at the upper end by a plurality of protrusion members (not shown) formed on the upper locking member 1938 penetrating each circular opening on the upper end side. Similarly, the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are connected at the lower end by a plurality of protrusion members (not shown) formed on the lower upper locking member 1940 penetrating each circular opening on the lower end side. The two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B connected in this way are fixed to the light guide plate cover 1936. When connecting the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B, a decorative cover 1942 that functions as a decorative plate of the left light effect unit 900L is also attached to the surface (player) side of the light guide plate 1911.

The protrusion members penetrating the circular openings of the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B have substantially the same length regardless of whether they are on the proximal end side or the anti-base end side. In this way, by making the protrusion members penetrating the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B substantially the same, the length can be kept within a constant range regardless of the distance between the light guide plates (horizontal length to the opposite light guide plates). It can be suppressed.

The upper and lower ends of the light guide plate cover 1936 are connected to the lens base 1930 by a cover mounting member (not shown), and the light guide plate 1911 and the lens 1928 are integrally arranged so as to face the LED substrate 1922.

Further, the side surfaces 1911A1 and 1911B on the base end side of the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are also cut so as to form a surface facing the LED arranged on the LED substrate 1922, so that light is emitted from the LED. The light is incident on the side surfaces 1911A1 and 1911B1 on the base end side substantially perpendicularly so that the light can be sufficiently received.

Here, as for the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B, the flat surfaces 1911A and 1911B3 are cut so that the surfaces facing the LEDs are formed, similarly to the three light guide plates 911A, 911B and 911C. As a result, the straightness of the light incident on the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B can be increased, and while the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are tilted with respect to the LED substrate 1922, the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plates 1911 are tilted. It is possible to make the image appear clearly in.

Further, on the side opposite to the LED substrate 1922 side, an open region 1980 is formed between the lens 1928 and the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B. Then, in this open area 1980, various light effects can be performed.

As described above, the inner wall (reflecting member) 914L, 914R (see, for example, FIGS. 45 and 46) of the side covers 903L and 903R of the front panel 500 is in the tilting direction of the light guide plate on the front side of the LED substrate 1922. It is tilted in the same direction. When the light emitted from the LED arranged on the LED substrate 1922 enters the side surfaces 1911A1 and 1911B1 of the light guide plate 1911, the flat surfaces 1911A3, 1911B3 and 1911C3 of the light guide plate 1911 have patterns and characters applied in advance. Images such as appear. The images appearing on the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 are reflected by the inner wall 914L that functions as a reflecting surface and reach the player's field of view. A part of the light emitted from the lens 1928 is also reflected and reaches the player's field of view. In this case, the player directly visually recognizes the light emitted from the lens 1928 and / or the image appearing on each of the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911, and visually recognizes the image reflected by the inner surface wall 914L and the like. In combination with, it is possible to make people aware of the double image of light.

Further, the side surfaces 1911A2 and 1911B2 on the anti-base end side of the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are not perpendicular to the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plates 1911, respectively, but are the tables of the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3. It is cut so that the angle formed between the back surface and the front surface (the surface on the player side) is an acute angle (see, for example, FIG. 59). As described above, since the side surfaces 1911A1 and 1911B1 on the base end side are also cut, the cross section seen when these light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are cut in the horizontal direction is a flat surface as shown in FIG. 59, for example. Of the front and back surfaces of 1911A3 and 1911B3, the trapezoidal shape has the back surface (the surface on the lens 1928 side) as the upper bottom and the front surface (the surface on the player side) as the lower bottom.

As described above, the angle between the side surfaces 1911A2 and 1911B2 of the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B on the anti-base end side and the front surface (the surface on the player side) of the front and back surfaces of the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 is an acute angle. By cutting the light guide plate so as to be The player's consciousness can be watched on the images appearing on the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911. On the other hand, for a third party who is not a party to the game of the pachislot, the light emitted from each side surface 1911A2, 1911B2 of the light guide plate 1911 is used to make the pachislot in an advantageous state or to have an expectation. It is possible to appeal that it is in a high state. In particular, when a plurality of light guide plates 1911 are brought close to each other so that the side surfaces 1911A2 and 1911B2 on the anti-base end side are substantially flush with each other, the side surfaces 1911A2 on the anti-base end side of the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B Since the thickness of 1911B2 becomes thicker and thick light is emitted, it is possible to strongly appeal to the above-mentioned third party. Further, since the light emitted from the lens 1928 can be visually recognized even in the open region 1980, the effect is great. Further, in combination with the light emitted from each side surface 911A2 and 911B2 of the light guide plate 911, it is possible to appeal over a wide range. In particular, in a gaming machine in which an effect image is displayed by projecting an image light projected from a projector 213, the appeal to a third party tends to be weakened, so that the effect is remarkable.

Further, in the present embodiment, the side surfaces 1911A2 and 1911B2 on the anti-base end side of the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are placed between the front and back surfaces (the surface on the player side) of the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3. It is cut so that the angle formed is an acute angle, but instead of this, it may be cut so that it is an obtuse angle. In this case, the emission of light from each side surface 1911A2, 1911B2 on the opposite base end side of the light guide plate 1911 can be visually recognized from the player side, and is combined with the image appearing on each flat surface 1911A3, 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911. Therefore, it is possible to perform a production that enhances the interest of the player.

Further, the emission color of the light emitted from each side surface 1911A2, 1911B2 on the anti-base end side of the light guide plate 1911 can be arbitrarily determined, but if the emission color is set to a warm color or a rainbow color, the game is further enhanced. It is possible to enhance the interest of the person. Further, the emission color of the light emitted from each side surface 911A2, 911B2, 911C2 on the anti-base end side of the light guide plate 911 and the emission color of the light emitted from each side surface 1911A2, 1911B2 on the anti-base end side of the light guide plate 1911. For example, by changing the and, according to the game state, various effects can be performed.

Regarding the left light guide plate subunit 910L, the side surface 911A1 on the base end side of the third light guide plate 911C has a comb-teeth shape corresponding to the LED arrangement pitch, but the right light guide plate subunit 910R has an LED. It does not have a comb-shaped light guide plate corresponding to the arrangement pitch of. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the right light guide plate subunit 910R may also have a comb-shaped light guide plate corresponding to the LED arrangement pitch.

Further, when the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are arranged in an overlapping manner, the space between one light guide plate and the other adjacent light guide plates is widened on the proximal end side, and gradually toward the anti-base end side. I try to make it narrower. In the method, a rib having an inclined surface that inclines downward from the proximal end side to the opposite proximal end side may be formed between the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B. However, bosses having different heights on the proximal end side and the anti-base end side may be formed between the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B.

In this way, by making the space between the flat surfaces of the light guide plates widest on the proximal end side, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LEDs arranged in the adjacent rows from entering. In addition, by narrowing the space between the flat surfaces of the light guide plate on the anti-base end side, the light emitted from the side surface of the light guide plate can be thickened, and the appeal to a third party can be enhanced. can. Further, since the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are connected to each other by forming ribs and bosses on the light guide plates facing each other and fixed to the light guide plate cover 1936, the stability when transporting the pastillo is also improved. It exerts the effect of being excellent.

(3) Aspects of the light emission effect of the light effect unit Next, the mode of the light emission effect of the light effect unit will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. Here, of the right side light effect unit 900R and the left side light effect unit 900L, the right side light effect unit 900R will be described as an example.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an aspect of the right light effect unit 900 when neither the right light guide plate subunit 910R nor the right lens subunit 912R is performing light emission effect. In this case, no pattern appears on each of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 on any of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C (see, for example, FIG. 53). Therefore, the right lens subunit 912R behind can be visually recognized through the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C.

However, all or at least one of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C is subjected to the impermeable treatment. In this impermeable treatment, letters / patterns 915 of the alphabet are applied to the upper and lower portions of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3. Since the portion subjected to the impermeable treatment in this way is vapor-deposited with, for example, a silver metal color foil, it can be visually recognized regardless of whether or not the light emission effect is performed. Here, the pattern or the like is not visually recognized in the light transmitting region, but the characters / patterns 915 in the upper and lower non-transparent regions can be visually recognized. Therefore, since the light transmitting region around the transparent region is transparent, the characters / patterns 915 in the non-transparent region can be seen three-dimensionally and conspicuously. Therefore, even if neither the right light guide plate subunit 910R nor the right lens subunit 912R is subjected to light emission effect, it is possible to provide a visual visual effect.

In FIG. 62, when the LED 921 arranged on the LED substrate 922 is partially lit, the light emitting effect is performed on the right light guide plate subunit 910R, and the light emitting effect is not performed on the right lens subunit 912R. It is a figure which shows the aspect of the right-right light effect unit 900R. In this case, patterns related to the pachislot motif appear on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C.

Here, the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are inclined so as to be separated from the LED substrate 922 from the proximal end side to the anti-base end side of the respective light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C while overlapping with each other. Therefore, the patterns appearing on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the respective light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C can be visually recognized with parallax, and a three-dimensional image appears to emerge. In FIG. 62, since the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 are each provided with a triangular pattern 916, it is difficult to grasp on the drawing, but the patterns applied to the respective flat surface carrying surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3. The 916 is visually recognized with parallax, and a three-dimensional effect can be felt. In this way, it is possible to produce a highly visual visual effect, and it is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game.

In FIG. 63, when the LED 921 arranged on the LED substrate 922 is partially lit, the light emitting effect is not performed on the right light guide plate subunit 910R, and the light emitting effect is performed on the right lens subunit 912R. It is a figure which shows the aspect of the right-right light effect unit 900R. In this case, on any of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C, any pattern including a triangular pattern 916 (see, for example, FIG. 62) is included in the light transmission region of each of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3. It hasn't appeared either. Therefore, the light emitting mode of the right lens subunit 912R behind can be visually recognized through the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C.

However, patterns and the like are not visible in the light transmission regions of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3 and 911C3 of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B and 911C, but the characters and patterns 915 in the upper and lower non-transparent regions are visible. can do. At this time, since the light transmitting region around the transparent region is transparent, the characters / patterns 915 in the non-transparent region can be seen three-dimensionally and conspicuously. In particular, since the light emitting effect of the right lens subunit 912R is performed, the characters / patterns 915 in the non-transparent region can be visually recognized more conspicuously. In this way, it is possible to produce a highly visual visual effect, and it is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 to 77, the processing executed by the pachislot sub-control circuit 150 (see FIG. 18) according to the second embodiment will be described.

[Main board communication task]
In the pachi-slot machine of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 transmits command data (data of various control commands related to the effect based on the progress of the game and the operation of the player) to the sub control circuit 150. The sub control circuit 150 receives the command data transmitted from the main control circuit 90. The sub-control circuit 150 determines the effect corresponding to the type of the command data based on the received command data, and the display device 120 shown in FIG. 19 (projector 213 shown in FIG. 15 and movable shown in FIG. 20). The screen unit 700), the LED 921 (see FIG. 50), the sub-display device 18 (see FIG. 15), the speaker group 84, and the LED group 85 are driven to control the effect. That is, the sub control circuit 150 has an information receiving means capable of receiving a command transmitted by the main control circuit 90 and executing control related to the effect based on the received command.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65, a main board communication task executed by the sub control circuit 150 (sub CPU 151) shown in FIG. 18 will be described. Note that FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of the main board communication task in the present embodiment. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of a command format (array of command data) transmitted from the main control circuit 90.

The main board communication task is a task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 90 (see FIG. 16). The main board communication task monitors the reception of command data at a cycle of 10 msec in order to receive the command transmitted by the main control circuit 90 by the sub CPU 151.

In the example shown in FIG. 65, the command format consists of 8 bytes of data. In the command format shown in FIG. 65, the first byte indicates the type of the command, the second to seventh bytes indicate the data according to the type of the command, and the eighth byte is the thumb data (whether or not the data was accurately transmitted). The error detection code) for checking is shown.

With reference to FIG. 64, first, the sub CPU 151 initializes the communication message queue transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 150 (sub CPU 151) (S1). Next, the sub CPU 151 acquires a receive command from the communication message queue (S2). Next, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not there is a command in the communication message queue (S3). When it is determined in S3 that there is no command in the communication message queue (when the determination in S3 is NO), the sub CPU 151 returns to S2 and performs processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3 that there is a command in the communication message queue (when the determination in S3 is YES), the sub CPU 151 checks the received command (S4).

Next, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not the received command is a valid command (S5). Note that "the received command is valid" means, for example, that in the command format shown in FIG. 65, the command type (D1) and the SUM (D8) value are normal values. .. When it is determined in S5 that the received command is not a valid command (when the determination in S5 is NO), the sub CPU 151 returns to S2 and performs processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S5 that the received command is a valid command (when the determination in S5 is YES), the sub CPU 151 performs the command analysis process (S6). The details of the command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 66 described later.

[Command analysis processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the command analysis process performed in S6 during the main board communication task (see FIG. 64) will be described. Note that FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the command analysis process in the present embodiment.

First, the sub CPU 151 performs an effect content determination process (S110). The details of the effect content determination process will be described later.

Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determination process (S110), the sub CPU 151 determines the content of the animation displayed on the sub display device 18 based on the determined effect content. Data determination processing is performed (S120).

Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determination process (S110), the sub CPU 151 determines the lamp data such as turning on and off the lamp group 21 and the brightness based on the determined effect content. The determination process is performed (S130).

Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determination process (S110), the sub CPU 151 determines the content of the BGM and the sound effect output from the speaker group 84 based on the determined effect content. Data determination processing is performed (S140).

Next, when the effect content is determined in the effect content determination process (S110), the sub CPU 151 performs a screen accessory data determination process for determining the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700 based on the determined effect content. Do (S150).

Next, when the determined data exists, the sub CPU 151 registers each data in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 152 (S160). After that, the sub CPU 151 ends the command analysis process.

[Production content determination process]
Next, the effect content determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 67. Note that FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect content determination process in the present embodiment. The effect content determination process is a process performed in S110 of the command analysis process (see FIG. 66). In the effect content determination process, the effect content is determined according to the type of command (value of D1 shown in FIG. 65) received by the sub control circuit 150 (sub CPU 151).

First, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not the medal insertion command has been received (S21). When the sub CPU 151 determines that the medal insertion command has not been received in S21 (when the determination in S21 is NO), the sub CPU 151 proceeds to S23.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S21 that the medal insertion command has been received (when the determination in S21 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 determines the effect content according to the parameter included in the medal insertion command. (S22), and then the effect content determination process is terminated.

In S23, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not the start command has been received. When it is determined in S23 that the start command has been received, the sub CPU 151 performs a process at the time of receiving the start command (S24). In the process at the time of receiving the start command, the random value for the effect is extracted, and the effect number is determined and registered by lottery based on the internal winning combination and the like. The effect number is data that specifies the content of the effect.

In S23, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not a start command indicating that the start lever 16 has been operated has been received. When it is determined in S23 that the start command has not been received (when the determination in S23 is NO), the sub CPU 151 shifts to S25 and performs processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S23 that the start command has been received (when the determination in S23 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 performs a start command reception process (S24), and then ends the effect content determination process.

In S25, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not a reel rotation start command indicating that the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has started has been received. When it is determined in S25 that the reel rotation start command has not been received (NO determination in S25), the sub CPU 151 shifts to S27 and performs processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S25 that the reel rotation start command has been received (when the determination in S25 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 determines the reel rotation start according to the parameter included in the reel rotation start command. The command reception process is performed (S26), and then the effect content determination process is terminated.

In S27, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not a reel stop command indicating that the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has stopped has been received. When it is determined in S27 that the reel stop command has not been received (when the determination in S27 is NO), the sub CPU 151 shifts to S29 and performs processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S27 that the reel stop command has been received (when the determination in S27 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 receives the reel stop command that determines the effect content according to the parameter included in the reel stop command. The process is performed, and then the effect content determination process is terminated.

In S29, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not the winning operation command has been received. When it is determined in S29 that the winning operation command has not been received (when the determination in S29 is NO), the sub CPU 151 shifts to S31.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S29 that the winning operation command has been received (when the determination in S29 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 receives the winning operation command that determines the effect content according to the parameter included in the winning operation command. The process is performed, and then the effect content determination process is terminated.

In S31, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not a bonus end command indicating that the bonus game has ended has been received. When it is determined in S31 that the bonus end command has not been received (when the determination in S31 is NO), the sub CPU 151 shifts to S33 and performs processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S31 that the bonus end command has been received (when the determination in S31 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 receives the bonus end command that determines the effect content according to the parameter included in the bonus end command. The process is performed (S32), and then the effect content determination process is terminated.

In S33, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not a bonus start command indicating that the bonus game has started has been received. When it is determined in S33 that the sub CPU 151 has not received the bonus start command (when the determination in S33 is NO), the sub CPU 151 shifts to S35 and performs processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S33 that the bonus start command has been received (when the determination in S33 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 receives the bonus start command that determines the effect content according to the parameter included in the bonus start command. The process is performed (S34), and then the effect content determination process is terminated.

In S35, whether or not the sub CPU 151 has received the lock start command (that is, the invalidation period start command (hereinafter, the same)) indicating that the lock effect (that is, the invalidation period (hereinafter, the same)) has started. Determine. When it is determined in S35 that the lock start command has not been received (when the determination in S35 is NO), the sub CPU 151 shifts to S37 and performs processing. That is, the command data transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 150 includes a lock start command (lock effect start information) indicating that the lock effect has been started. The lock effect will be described in the focus change process described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S35 that the lock start command has been received (when the determination in S35 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 receives the lock start command that determines the effect content according to the parameter included in the lock start command. The process is performed (S36), and then the effect content determination process is terminated.

In S37, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not a lock end command indicating that the lock effect has ended has been received. When it is determined in S37 that the sub CPU 151 has not received the lock end command (when the determination in S37 is NO), the sub CPU 151 ends the effect content determination process. That is, the command data transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 150 includes a lock end command (lock effect end information) capable of determining whether or not the lock effect has ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S37 that the lock end command has been received (when the determination in S37 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 receives the lock end command that determines the effect content according to the parameter included in the lock end command. The process is performed (S38), and then the effect content determination process is terminated.

It should be noted that any of the 2nd to 7th bytes of the start command is added including the type of lock effect and the notification game state (for example, ART game state) in which the notification navigation is generated. The main CPU 101 sets the type of lock effect and the notification game state (for example, ART game state, etc.) added to the 2nd to 7th bytes of the start command to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery means and a plurality of RT states. By drawing (or determining) based on (a state in which the winning probabilities of a plurality of replays are different), a gaming state having a different degree of advantage such as a general gaming state, a bonus gaming state, and an ART gaming state is determined. That is, the main CPU 101 in the present embodiment constitutes a gaming state changing means for determining a plurality of gaming states having different degrees of advantage and changing the gaming state.

The transmission timing of each command transmitted from the main control circuit 90 (main CPU 101) to the sub control circuit 150 (sub CPU 151) is as follows. The medal insertion command is the timing at which the medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 14, or the timing at which the MAX bet button 15a or the 1-bet button 15b is pressed. The start command is a timing at which the main CPU 101 performs various lottery processes when the start lever 16 is pressed. The reel rotation start command is the timing at which the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start rotating. The reel stop command is a timing at which any of the three stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R is pressed, and any of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R corresponding to the pressed stop button is stopped. The winning operation command is the timing at which all the rotations of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped, and the combination of the symbols of the reels stopped at the effective line is determined. The bonus end command is the timing when the main CPU 101 determines that the bonus game has ended. The bonus start command is the timing when the main CPU 101 determines that the bonus game has started (when the bonus symbols are aligned on the valid line). The lock start command is the timing at which the main CPU 101 starts executing the lock effect after the start lever is pressed or after all the rotations of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped. The lock end command is the timing at which the main CPU 101 ends the execution of the lock effect after the start lever is pressed or after all the rotations of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped.

Further, data such as an internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery means, a type of lock effect, and the like are added to the second to seventh bytes of the start command, and are transmitted from the main CPU 101 to the sub CPU 151.

[Screen accessory control task]
A screen accessory control task executed by the sub-control circuit 150 (sub-CPU 151) will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 71. The screen accessory control task is a task for controlling the rotational operation of the movable screen unit 700 (see, for example, FIG. 21). Note that FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the screen accessory control task in the present embodiment. FIGS. 69 to 71 are diagrams showing an example of a motor sequence table including control signal data of a motor 812 (see FIG. 33) for rotating a movable screen unit 700 (prism screen 710). These motor sequence tables also include data on which of the plurality of projection planes 7123, 7141, 7167 is stopped at the projection plane origin position. In addition, FIGS. 69 to 71 are continuous in the order of FIGS. 69, 70, 71. The motor sequence table is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 (see, for example, FIG. 18).

That is, the motor sequence table shown in FIGS. 69 to 71 constitutes the drive data, and the ROM cartridge board 86 that stores the motor sequence table constitutes the drive data storage means.

In this specification, the reference position of the projection surface when the image light is projected from the projector 213 onto the projection surface of the movable screen unit 700 is referred to as “projection surface origin position”. For example, in FIG. 38, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 is stopped at the “projection surface origin position”.

Further, in this specification, a position facing the stopper 794 (for example, see FIG. 38), that is, a plurality of grooves 7444 (for example, see FIG. 39) of the gear shape portion 744 (for example, see FIG. 38). Of these, the position of the groove 7444 that engages with the stopper pin 7944 when the stopper 794 operates downward is referred to as a "groove origin position".

Further, in this specification, when the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 is stopped at the projection surface origin position, the groove at the groove origin position is referred to as a “first projection surface reference groove”. Similarly, when the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 is stopped at the projection surface origin position, the groove at the groove origin position is referred to as a "second projection surface reference groove", and the third screen member 716 The groove at the groove origin position when the projection surface 7167 is stopped at the projection surface origin position is referred to as a "third projection surface reference groove".

Next, the motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20 shown in FIGS. 69 to 71 will be described. The sub CPU 151 controls the rotational operation of the motor 812 (see, for example, FIG. 33) based on any of the motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20.

The motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20 have different operation modes from the start to the stop of the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 for each table. Further, the motor control data of the motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20 also includes information on which of the plurality of projection planes 7123, 7141, 7167 is stopped at the projection plane origin position. Note that FIGS. 69 to 71 illustrate the motor sequence tables MT01 to MT06, MT15 and MT20, and the other motor sequence tables MT6 to MT14 and MT16 to MT19 are not shown.

Here, each table of the motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20 will be briefly described. Of the above-mentioned projection planes 7123, 7141, 7167, the projection plane stopped at the projection plane origin position is different depending on the gaming state. In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 151 stops the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700 at the projection surface origin position in the ART gaming state so that the projection surface 7123 stops at the projection surface origin position in the general gaming state. In the special zone, the projection plane 7167 is controlled to stop at the projection plane origin position.

In the present embodiment, the projection plane stopped at the origin position of the projection plane is set to be different depending on the gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the projection plane 7141 is set even though it is in the general gaming state. The player may be given a sense of expectation by stopping at the origin position of the projection surface. Further, for example, when the advantage is difficult to grasp from the appearance (for example, from the player) in a gaming state (for example, a chance state), either the projection surface 7123 or the projection surface 7141 is projected depending on the situation. It may be stopped at the origin position.

The motor sequence tables MT01 to MT06 are tables used, for example, when the gaming state is changed, and among the projection planes 7123,7141,7167, the projection plane corresponding to the gaming state is stopped at the projection plane origin position. It is a motor sequence table for rotating the movable screen unit 700 as described above. Of these, the motor sequence table MT01 particularly constitutes the second drive data. The motor sequence table MT15 performs a rotational operation (hereinafter referred to as "fanning effect") in which forward rotation and reverse rotation of the movable screen unit 700 are alternately repeated, and then rotates the movable screen unit 700 in the forward direction for projection. It is a motor sequence table for stopping any one of the surfaces 7123, 7141, 7167 at the origin position of the projection surface, and constitutes specific drive data or first drive data. When the cancellation request (details will be described later in [Screen accessory sequence processing] described later) is generated in the motor sequence table MT20 when the movable screen unit 700 is executing the fanning effect (step numbers 1 to 51). In addition, it is a motor sequence table dedicated to when a cancellation request is generated, which is used only for stopping the projection surface 7123 at the origin position of the projection surface, and constitutes dedicated drive data or a third drive data.

In addition, the above-mentioned fanning effect is an operation effect in which a movable member (for example, a prism screen 710) is repeatedly driven in one direction and another direction, and the mode of such an operation effect is a specific aspect. Not limited. For example, a longer time than the control of rotating the movable member simply to change the projection plane stopped at the origin position of the projection plane to another projection plane (for example, the control based on the motor sequence tables MT01 to MT03). The mode is not limited as long as it is an motion effect of rotating over or in a special mode (for example, irregular rotation).

Hereinafter, the motor sequence table MT01 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 69 and 75. Note that FIG. 75 shows the timing of turning on (excited state) and off (non-excited state) of the control signals (A phase, B phase, —A phase, —B phase) of the motor 812 in the motor sequence table MT01, which will be described later. Relationship between on (excited state) and off (non-excited state) timing of the solenoid 792 for controlling the vertical movement of the stopper pin 7944 of the solenoid 792 in the solenoid sequence table ST01 to prevent the rotation of the movable screen unit 700. It is a timing chart showing. In this specification, for convenience, the reverse phases of the A phase and the B phase shown in FIG. 75 are referred to as -A phase and -B phase, respectively.

The motor sequence table MT01 accelerates the movable screen unit 700 in the positive direction, and the light-shielding piece 791 (for example, FIG. 24) is a table that controls the rotational operation of the movable screen unit 700 so that the projection surface 7123 stops at the projection surface origin position by decelerating based on the detection. In this specification, the clockwise direction in FIG. 38 is referred to as "forward rotation".

As shown in FIG. 69, the motor sequence table MT01 includes pulse control of step numbers 1 to 13. In the motor sequence table MT01, the pulse width, the number of pulses, and the motor control state of the control signal (pulse signal) that controls the motor (stepping motor) 812 are set for each step (also for other motor sequence tables). Similarly). It should be noted that one pulse of the control signal has an on section of the half pulse width and an off section of the half pulse width, and the “pulse width” in FIGS. 69 to 71 is the time for half a pulse (the unit is) for convenience. ms) is shown. Further, step number "-1" indicates the end of control based on the motor sequence table MT01. Further, the motor control "Hold" indicates that the rotation of the motor 821 is stopped by excitation, the motor control "+" indicates that the motor 821 is rotated in the positive direction, and the motor control "-" indicates that the motor 821 is rotated in the positive direction. It shows that the motor 821 is rotated in the opposite direction. In the hold state (step number 1, step number 13) described later, the section is continuously turned on.

As shown in FIG. 75, the motor sequence table MT01 has the phase A and the phase B of the motor 812 (two-phase excitation motor) turned on (excited state) in step number 1. At the same time as matching (making them in phase), the phase of -A phase and the phase of -B phase are matched in the off state (non-excited state) (in phase), and the rotation of the motor 812 is stopped. ..

Next, although not shown in FIG. 75, in step numbers 2 to 6 of the motor sequence table MT01, the phases of the B phase, the −A phase, and the −B phase are set with respect to the A phase, respectively. It delays 90 degrees, 180 degrees, and 270 degrees, and gradually reduces the pulse width at each step to accelerate the rotation of the motor 812 in the positive direction. The steps (step numbers 1 to 6) for accelerating the stopped motor 812 (that is, the prism screen 710) constitute acceleration data.

In step number 7 of the motor sequence table MT01, the light-shielding piece 791 (motor 812 (movable screen unit 700) is rotated at a constant speed until the position is detected by the optical sensor 802 (however, up to 432 pulses) is accelerated. Step number 7 for steady rotation of the motor 812 (that is, the column screen 710) constitutes steady data.

When the light-shielding piece 791 (see, for example, FIG. 24) is detected by the optical sensor 802 in step number 7 of the motor sequence table MT01, the process proceeds to step number 8 and subsequent steps. In step numbers 8 to 12, the pulse width is gradually increased for each step to decelerate the rotation of the motor 812. Step numbers 8 to 12 for decelerating after the motor 812 (that is, the prism screen 710) is constantly rotated constitutes deceleration data.

The combination of the pulse width and the number of pulses corresponding to the step numbers constitutes the acceleration data, the steady data, and the deceleration data not only in the motor sequence table MT01 but also in the other motor sequence tables MT02 to MT20. Is the same. That is, no matter which motor sequence table is selected, if the drive data has a gradually shortened pulse width, acceleration data is configured, and a step number in which a large number of the same pulse widths are continuous (in the case of the motor sequence table MT02, the step number). 7. If the motor sequence table MT15 is step number 58, etc.), steady data is configured, and if the drive data is such that the pulse width gradually increases, deceleration data is configured.

By the way, in step number 7 of the motor sequence table MT01, the detection signals of the optical sensor 804 and the optical sensor 806 are not output. Therefore, even if the light-shielding piece 791 (see, for example, FIG. 24) passes through the optical sensor 804 or the optical sensor 806, the light-shielding piece 791 is not detected by the optical sensor 804 or the optical sensor 806. However, instead of not outputting the detection signal of the optical sensor 804 or the optical sensor 806, although the detection signal of the optical sensor 804 or the optical sensor 806 is output, the light shielding piece 791 is detected by the optical sensor 804 or the optical sensor 806. Even if this is ignored, the movable screen unit 700 may continue to rotate until the light-shielding piece 791 is detected by the optical sensor 802. As for other motor sequence tables, the motor sequence table (for example, the motor sequence) in which the rotation of the motor 812 is continued until the light-shielding piece 791 is detected by the specific optical sensor at the step number for rotating the movable screen unit 700 at a constant speed. As long as it is in the table MT20), the same processing as above is performed. However, for example, in the motor sequence table MT15, such a process is not performed, and the shading piece 791 is detected by any of the optical sensors 802,804,806 at the step number (step number 58) for rotating the movable screen unit 700 at a constant speed. Even if this is done, the rotational operation of the motor 812 ends.

In this way, the sub CPU 151 executes control based on the motor sequence table according to the mode of the rotation operation of the projection surface and the movable screen unit 700 to be stopped at the origin position of the projection surface (modes 1 to 20). Therefore, it is possible to reliably stop the projection surface at the origin position of the projection surface without shifting the position while performing a predetermined effect operation.

Next, in step number 13 of the motor sequence table MT01, the phase of the A phase and the phase of the B phase of the motor 812 are matched (made in the same phase) in the off state (non-excited state), and the -A phase is set. The phase of the phase and the phase of the −B phase are matched (in the same phase) in the on state (excited state), and the rotation of the motor 812 is stopped. The step number 13 for stopping the motor 812 for a certain period of time after the motor 812 (that is, the prism screen 710) is decelerated constitutes the holding data.

As described above, in the motor sequence table MT01, the movable screen unit 700 is rotated in the forward direction by the above-mentioned series of controls, and the movable screen unit is at the timing when the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 reaches the projection surface origin position. 700 can be stopped.

The holding data is configured by the combination of the pulse width and the number of pulses corresponding to the step numbers, not only in the motor sequence table MT01 but also in the other motor sequence tables MT02 to MT20. That is, no matter which motor sequence table is selected, the phase of the A phase and the phase of the B phase of the motor 812 are matched (made in the same phase) in the off state (non-excited state) and are in the -A phase. When the phase and the phase of the −B phase are matched in the on state (excited state) (when they are in the same phase), the holding data is configured.

As shown in FIGS. 69 to 71, in step number 1, the motor 812 is held (maintained in the stopped state) for 300 (ms). The period 300 (ms) is derived by the pulse width × 2 × the number of pulses, specifically, 10 (ms) × 2 × 15 = 300 (ms). Further, in step number 7, the control signal is repeatedly turned on and off for a maximum of 432 pulses until the optical sensor 802 is detected. Further, in step number 13, the motor 812 is held for 600 (ms). The period 600 (ms) is derived by 10 (ms) × 2 × 300 = 600 (ms).

To put the motor 812 in the hold state, the A phase and the B phase are turned on, the -A phase and the -B phase are turned off, and the A phase and the B phase are turned off, and -A. The phases and —B phases may be on, the A and —A phases may be on, and the B and —B phases may be off, or the A, B, —A phases, And all four phases of -B phase may be turned on. The same applies to other motor sequence tables.

The maximum number of pulses 432 (Max432) in step number 7 is the number of pulses required for the movable screen unit 700 to make substantially one rotation. Therefore, in step number 7, if the optical sensor 802 is not detected by the time the pulse number 432 is reached, an abnormality has occurred in the optical sensor 802, the motor 812, the gear group such as the reduction mechanism 818 and the intermediate gear 820, and the like. Therefore, the sub CPU 151 performs error processing. As this error processing, for example, the rotational operation of the movable screen unit 700 is terminated, the solenoid 792 is controlled to the non-excited state, an error message is displayed on the sub display device 18 (see, for example, FIG. 1), and the speaker is displayed. Processing such as outputting a warning sound from 65L and 65R (see, for example, FIG. 4) is performed. The same error processing as described above is performed for the other motor sequence tables.

That is, the sub CPU 151 in the present embodiment provides an abnormality processing means for executing error processing (processing when an abnormality occurs) when the light-shielding piece 791 is not detected by the optical sensor for a certain period of time while the prism screen 710 is rotating. Configure.

Next, the motor sequence tables MT02 to MT06 will be briefly described.

The motor sequence table MT02 accelerates the movable screen unit 700 in the positive direction, and the light-shielding piece 791 (for example, FIG. 24) is a table that controls the rotational operation of the movable screen unit 700 so that the projection surface 7141 stops at the projection surface origin position by decelerating based on the detection.

The difference between the motor sequence table MT02 and the motor sequence table M01 is that in step number 7, the light-shielding piece 791 rotates the motor 812 at a constant speed until the position is detected by the optical sensor 804 instead of the optical sensor 802 (however, the motor sequence table MT02 is different from the motor sequence table M01. The maximum number of pulses is 432, which is the same as that of the motor sequence table MT01). That is, the motor sequence table MT02 differs from the motor sequence table MT01 in that the projection surface stopped at the origin position of the projection surface is the projection surface 7141 instead of the projection surface 7123, but the other points are the same as those of the motor sequence table MT01. be.

The motor sequence table MT03 accelerates the movable screen unit 700 in the positive direction, and the light-shielding piece 791 (for example, FIG. 24) is a table that controls the rotational operation of the movable screen unit 700 so that the projection surface 7167 stops at the projection surface origin position by decelerating based on the detection.

The difference between the motor sequence table MT03 and the motor sequence table MT01 is that in step number 7, the light-shielding piece 791 rotates the motor 812 at a constant speed until the position is detected by the optical sensor 806 instead of the optical sensor 802 (however, the motor sequence table MT03 is different from the motor sequence table MT01. The maximum of 432 pulses is the same as that of the motor sequence table MT01). That is, the motor sequence table MT03 differs from the motor sequence table MT01 in that the projection surface stopped at the origin position of the projection surface is the projection surface 7167 instead of the projection surface 7123, but the other points are the same as those of the motor sequence table MT01. be.

The motor sequence table MT04 accelerates the movable screen unit 700 in the opposite direction, and the light-shielding piece 791 (for example, the figure) is provided by the optical sensor 802 provided corresponding to the projection surface 7123 in the constant speed rotation after the acceleration is completed. 24) is a table that controls the rotational operation of the movable screen unit 700 so that the projection surface 7123 stops at the projection surface origin position by decelerating based on the detection.

The difference between the motor sequence table MT04 and the motor sequence table MT01 is that the direction in which the movable screen unit 700 is rotated is not the forward direction but the reverse direction, and the other points are the same as those of the motor sequence table MT01.

The motor sequence table MT05 accelerates the movable screen unit 700 in the opposite direction, and the light-shielding piece 791 (for example, FIG. 24) is a table that controls the rotational operation of the movable screen unit 700 so that the projection surface 7141 stops at the projection surface origin position by decelerating based on the detection.

The difference between the motor sequence table MT05 and the motor sequence table MT01 is that the direction in which the movable screen unit 700 is rotated is not the forward direction but the reverse direction, and in step number 7, the shading piece 791 is not the optical sensor 802 but the light. The point is that the motor 812 is rotated at a constant speed until the position is detected by the sensor 804 (however, the maximum of 432 pulses is the same as the motor sequence table MT01), and the other points are the same as the motor sequence table MT01. be. In other words, the motor sequence table MT05 is different from the motor sequence table MT02 only in that the direction in which the movable screen unit 700 is rotated is not the forward direction but the reverse direction.

The motor sequence table MT06 accelerates the movable screen unit 700 in the opposite direction, and the light-shielding piece 791 (for example, FIG. 24) is a table that controls the rotational operation of the movable screen unit 700 so that the projection surface 7167 stops at the projection surface origin position by decelerating based on the detection.

The difference between the motor sequence table MT06 and the motor sequence table MT01 is that the direction in which the movable screen unit 700 is rotated is not the forward direction but the reverse direction, and in step number 7, the shading piece 791 is not the optical sensor 802 but the light. The point is that the motor 812 is rotated at a constant speed until the position is detected by the sensor 806 (however, the maximum of 432 pulses is the same as the motor sequence table MT01), and the other points are the same as the motor sequence table MT01. be. In other words, the motor sequence table MT05 is different from the motor sequence table MT03 only in that the direction in which the movable screen unit 700 is rotated is not the forward direction but the reverse direction.

Next, the motor sequence table MT15 will be described in detail. The motor sequence table MT15 rotates the movable screen unit 700 in the positive direction after performing a fanning effect as an aspect of an expected effect that makes the player expect that the gaming state may be changed to a more advantageous gaming state. It is a table for controlling the rotational operation of the movable screen unit 700 so that one of the projection planes 7123, 714, 7167 stops at the origin position of the projection plane. The motor sequence table MT15 includes pulse control of step numbers 1 to 64. In the motor sequence table MT15, the pulse width, the number of pulses, and the motor control state of the control signal of the motor 812 are set for each step.

The motor sequence table MT15 is composed of the control data of step numbers 1 to 64. Among them, step number 1 keeps the movable screen unit 700 in a stopped state until the operation effect of the movable screen unit 700 is executed. It is the control data for maintaining (putting it in the production standby state). In step number 1, the A phase and the B phase are matched in the on state, and the −A phase and the −B phase are matched in the off state to stop the rotation of the motor 812.

In step numbers 2 to 4, the phases of the B phase, the -A phase, and the -B phase are delayed by 90 degrees, 180 degrees, and 270 degrees with respect to the A phase, respectively, and the pulse width is gradually increased for each step. Make it smaller to accelerate the rotation of the motor 812 in the positive direction.

In step numbers 5 to 7, the pulse width is gradually increased for each step to decelerate the rotation of the motor 812.

In step number 8, the phase of the A phase and the phase of the B phase of the motor 812 are matched in the on state, and the phase of the −A phase and the phase of the −B phase are matched in the off state, so that the motor 812 is matched. Stop the rotation of.

In step numbers 9 to 11, the phases of -A phase, B phase, and A phase are delayed by 90 degrees, 180 degrees, and 270 degrees with respect to -B phase, respectively, and the pulse width is gradually increased for each step. Make it smaller to accelerate the rotation of the motor 812 in the opposite direction.

In step numbers 11 to 14, the pulse width is gradually increased for each step to decelerate the rotation of the motor 812.

In step number 15, the phase of the A phase and the phase of the B phase are matched in the on state, and the phase of the −A phase and the phase of the −B phase are matched in the off state to rotate the motor 812. Stop it.

In step numbers 16 to 18, the phases of the B phase, the -A phase, and the -B phase are delayed by 90 degrees, 180 degrees, and 270 degrees with respect to the A phase, respectively, and the pulse width is gradually increased for each step. Make it smaller to accelerate the rotation of the motor 812 in the positive direction.

In step numbers 19 to 21, the pulse width is gradually increased for each step to decelerate the rotation of the motor 812.

In step number 22, the phase of the A phase and the phase of the B phase are matched in the on state, and the phase of the −A phase and the phase of the −B phase are matched in the off state to rotate the motor 812. Stop it.

In step numbers 23 to 25, the phase of the A phase and the phase of the B phase are made opposite to each other, and the pulse width is gradually reduced for each step to accelerate the rotation of the motor 812 in the opposite direction.

In step numbers 26 to 28, the pulse width is gradually increased for each step to decelerate the rotation of the motor 812.

In step number 29, the phase of the A phase and the phase of the B phase are matched in the on state, and the phase of the −A phase and the phase of the −B phase are matched in the on state to rotate the motor 812. Stop it.

In step numbers 30 to 32, the phases of the B phase, the -A phase, and the -B phase are delayed by 90 degrees, 180 degrees, and 270 degrees with respect to the A phase, respectively, and the pulse width is gradually increased for each step. Make it smaller to accelerate the rotation of the motor 812 in the positive direction.

In step numbers 33 to 35, the pulse width is gradually increased for each step to decelerate the rotation of the motor 812.

In step number 36, the phase of the A phase and the phase of the B phase are matched in the on state, and the phase of the −A phase and the phase of the −B phase are matched in the on state to rotate the motor 812. Stop it.

In step numbers 37 to 39, the phases of -A phase, B phase, and A phase are delayed by 90 degrees, 180 degrees, and 270 degrees with respect to -B phase, respectively, and the pulse width is gradually reduced for each step. Then, the rotation of the motor 812 is accelerated in the opposite direction.

In step numbers 40 to 42, the pulse width is gradually increased to decelerate the rotation of the motor 812.

In step number 43, the phase A and the phase B of the motor 812 are brought into the same phase, and the rotation of the motor 812 is stopped.

In step numbers 44 to 46, the phase of the A phase and the phase of the B phase are made opposite to each other, and the pulse width is gradually reduced to accelerate the rotation of the motor 812 in the positive direction.

In step numbers 47 to 50, the pulse width is gradually increased for each step to decelerate the rotation of the motor 812.

In step number 51, the phase of the A phase and the phase of the B phase are matched in the on state, and the phase of the −A phase and the phase of the −B phase are matched in the on state to rotate the motor 812. Stop it.

In step numbers 52 to 57, the phases of the B phase, the -A phase, and the -B phase are delayed by 90 degrees, 180 degrees, and 270 degrees with respect to the A phase, respectively, and the pulse width is gradually increased for each step. Make it smaller to accelerate the rotation of the motor 812 in the positive direction.

At step number 58, the shading piece 791 (see, eg, FIG. 24) rotates the motor 812 at a constant speed until the position is detected by any of the optical sensors 802, 804, 806.

When the light-shielding piece 791 (see, for example, FIG. 24) is detected by the optical sensor 802 in step number 58, the process proceeds to step number 59 and thereafter. In step numbers 59 to 63, the pulse width is gradually increased for each step to decelerate the rotation of the motor 812.

Next, in step number 64, the phase of the A phase and the phase of the B phase are matched in the on state, and the phase of the −A phase and the phase of the −B phase are matched in the on state, so that the motor 812 is matched. Stop the rotation of.

The motor sequence table MT15 shifts to a highly advantageous gaming state by performing a fanning effect (step numbers 1 to 51) in which forward rotation and reverse rotation are alternately repeated by the above series of controls. It is possible to perform a production that makes you expect.

The pulse width and the number of pulses shown in FIGS. 69 to 71 are verified based on the calculated values in design so that the movable screen unit 700 can be stopped while the projection surface is at the origin position of the projection surface. It is a value derived by.

Next, the motor sequence table MT20 will be described in detail. In this embodiment, the details will be described later, but when the cancellation request is generated when the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700 based on the motor sequence table MT15 is being executed, the motor sequence table is generated according to the cancellation request generation timing. MT15 is continued or the motor sequence table MT15 is changed to another motor sequence table. The motor sequence table MT20 is one of the other motor sequence tables (that is, one of the motor sequence tables to be changed when the cancellation request is generated). The motor sequence table MT20 includes pulse control of step numbers 1 to 14.

In the motor sequence table MT20, in step number 1, the phase of the A phase and the phase of the B phase are matched in the on state, and the phase of the -A phase and the phase of the -B phase are matched in the on state. , The rotation of the motor 812 is stopped.

In step numbers 2 to 7, the phases of the B phase, the -A phase, and the -B phase are delayed by 90 degrees, 180 degrees, and 270 degrees with respect to the A phase, respectively, and the pulse width is gradually reduced for each step. Then, the rotation of the motor 812 is accelerated.

In step number 8, the motor 812 is rotated at a constant speed until the optical sensor 802 is detected. In step number 8, the control signal is repeatedly turned on and off for a maximum of 432 pulses until the light-shielding piece 791 is detected by the optical sensor 802.

When the light-shielding piece 791 is detected by the optical sensor 802 in step number 8, the process proceeds to step number 9 and subsequent steps. In step numbers 9 to 13, the pulse width is gradually increased for each step to decelerate the rotation of the motor 812.

In step number 14, the phase of the A phase and the phase of the B phase are matched in the off state, and the phase of the −A phase and the phase of the −B phase are matched in the on state to rotate the motor 812. Stop it.

In the motor sequence table M20, the movable screen unit 700 is rotated in the positive direction by the above series of controls, and the movable screen unit 700 arrives at the projection surface origin position of the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712. Can be stopped.

[Screen accessory control task]
The screen accessory control task shown in FIG. 68 will be described. First, the sub CPU 151 performs a screen accessory activation control process for activating the screen accessory (S41). In the screen accessory activation control process, the sub CPU 151 controls to activate the drive driver of the motor 812 that rotationally drives the movable screen unit 700. Next, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not there is screen accessory data registered in S16 of the command analysis process shown in FIG. 66 (S42). This screen accessory data is data that requires the rotational operation of the movable screen unit 700. When it is determined in S42 that there is no screen accessory data (NO determination in S42), the sub CPU 151 performs the process of S44.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S42 that there is screen accessory data (when the determination in S42 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 performs the screen accessory sequence process (S43), and then performs the process of S44. The details of the screen accessory sequence processing (S43) will be described later.

In S44, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not the current step number is "-1" in the current motor sequence (for example, MT01) of the motor sequence table (motor control data) shown in FIGS. 69 to 71. Here, "-1" means an end block in each motor sequence. That is, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not the current motor sequence has ended. When it is determined in S44 that the current step number is not "-1" (when the determination in S44 is NO), the sub CPU 151 performs the screen accessory control process (S45). The details of the screen accessory control process (S45) will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S44 that the current step number is "-1" (when the determination in S44 is Yes), the current motor sequence has not been completed, so that the sub CPU 151 performs the process in S42. return.

After S45, the sub CPU 151 performs a focus change process (S46), and then returns the process to S42.

That is, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory control task constitutes a drive control means and a locking control means.

[Screen accessory sequence processing]
A screen accessory sequence process (process of S43 in FIG. 68) executed by the sub-control circuit 150 (sub-CPU 151) will be described with reference to FIG. 73. Note that FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the screen accessory sequence processing in the present embodiment.

First, the sub CPU 151 acquires the screen accessory data registered in the sub RAM 152 (S51).

Next, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not the acquired screen accessory data has been canceled (whether or not the above-mentioned cancellation request has occurred) (S52). In the present embodiment, a predetermined operation (for example, operation of the start lever 16, operation of the MAX bet button 15a, operation of the 1-bet button 15b, or stop buttons 17L, 17C) is performed by the player during the rotational operation of the movable screen unit 700. , 17R) is performed, the main CPU 101 transmits a medal insertion command or a start command to the sub CPU 151. When the sub CPU 151 receives the medal insertion command or the start command from the main CPU 101, the sub CPU 151 is rotating the movable screen unit 700 in the medal insertion command reception processing or the start command reception processing of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 67). If it is determined, a cancellation request is generated. In S52, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not the cancellation request has occurred (that is, whether or not there has been a request indicating that the cancellation request has occurred).

That is, the sub CPU 151 that executes the effect content determination process receives a cancel request for stopping the movable screen unit 700 during the rotation operation (a stop request for stopping the drive of the drive mechanism 815) in response to a command transmitted from the main CPU 101. ) Is configured to generate a stop request.

When it is determined in S52 that the screen accessory data has not been canceled, the sub CPU 151 uses the motor control data (for example, see FIGS. 69 to 71) of the motor sequence table corresponding to the screen accessory data. It is acquired and registered in the storage area for the motor sequence in the sub RAM 152 (S54).

Next, the sub CPU 151 acquires the solenoid control data of the solenoid sequence table (for example, see FIG. 72) corresponding to the screen accessory data, and registers the solenoid control data in the storage area for the solenoid sequence in the sub RAM 152 (S55).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S52 that the screen accessory data has been canceled, the sub CPU 151 performs the screen operation canceling process (S53). The details of the screen operation canceling process will be described below.

In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory sequence processing constitutes a driving mode determining means.

[Screen operation cancellation process]
The screen operation canceling process executed by the sub-control circuit 150 (sub-CPU 151) will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 76. The screen operation cancel process is the process of S53 in FIG. 73, and the projection of the first screen member 712 is triggered by the occurrence timing of the cancel request during the rotational operation of the movable screen unit 700 based on the motor sequence table MT15. This is a process of appropriately stopping the surface 7123 at the projection surface origin position (however, when the control based on the motor sequence table M15 is continued, the projection surfaces 7141, 7167 stop at the projection surface origin position). Note that FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the screen operation canceling process in the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of a cancellation check table referred to in S65 described later in the screen operation canceling process.

First, the cancellation check table shown in FIG. 76 will be described. The cancellation check table shown in FIG. 76 is a modified motor sequence table according to the timing at which the cancellation request is generated when the cancellation request is generated during the rotational operation of the movable screen unit 700 based on the motor sequence table MT15. It is a table showing the solenoid sequence table after the change, and is referred to in S65 described later. The timing of occurrence of the cancellation request is determined based on the total number of pulses (cumulative) from step number 1 of the motor sequence table MT15 to the step in which the cancellation request is generated.

"Low" and "High" shown in the cancellation check table are all No. (cumulative) of the total number of pulses output from the start of control based on the motor sequence table MT15 to the occurrence of the cancellation request. It is specified to determine whether it belongs to the number).

That is, although not shown in the flowchart, the sub CPU 151 has a pulse number counting means for counting the cumulative number of pulses output to the motor 812 during execution of control based on the motor sequence table MT15. During the execution of control based on the motor sequence table MT15, for example, the pulse is output 15 times in step number 1, the pulse is output 4 times in step numbers 2 to 6, and the pulse is output up to 432 times in step number 7. Although it is output, the pulses output in this way are added one by one, and the cumulative total is counted. This cumulative total is the sum of the above-mentioned number of pulses.

Therefore, for example, when the total number (cumulative) of the number of pulses from the start of the control based on the motor sequence table MT15 to the occurrence of the cancellation request is 346, it is determined to belong to No3. In this way, by defining the changed motor sequence table and the changed solenoid sequence table according to the timing at which the cancellation request is generated, the projection surface is placed at an appropriate position (projection surface origin position) when the cancellation request is generated. ) Can be stopped smoothly. The "Low" value and the "High" value in the cancellation check table are values derived by verification based on the calculated values in the design.

Next, the screen operation canceling process executed by the sub CPU 151 will be described with reference to FIG. 74. First, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not the running (operating) motor sequence is controlled based on the effect 15 (whether or not the control is based on the motor sequence table MT15) (S61). When it is determined in S61 that the motor sequence in operation is not the control based on the effect 15 (NO determination in S61), the sub CPU 151 ends the screen operation canceling process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S61 that the motor sequence being executed is the control based on the effect 15 (when the determination in S61 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 is in the control based on the motor sequence table MT15 being executed. The total number of pulses counted by the pulse number counting means described above (that is, the total number of pulses from the start of control based on the motor sequence table MT15 until the cancellation request is generated) is acquired (S62).

Next, the sub CPU 151 sets the No (number) of the loop counter to the initial value “0” (S63). The No (number) of the loop counter corresponds to the No (number) of the cancel check table.

Next, the sub CPU 151 adds "1" to No. (number) of the loop counter (S64).

Next, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not the total number of pulses acquired in step S62 is a value between the Low value and the High value in the cancellation check table of FIG. 76 (S65). The Low value and High value used in the determination of S65 are the Low value and the High value corresponding to the No (number) of the loop counter to which "1" is added in S64.

In S65, when it is determined that the total number of pulses is not a value between the Low value and the High value in the cancellation check table of FIG. 76 (when the determination in S65 is NO), the sub CPU 151 determines. Return to S64 and perform processing (1 is added to No (number) of the loop counter).

On the other hand, in S61, when it is determined that the motor sequence being executed is the control based on the effect 15 (when the determination in S61 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 has a loop counter No. (number) of 5 in S64. It is determined whether or not there is (S66). When it is determined in S66 that the No (number) of the loop counter in S64 is 5 (when the determination in S66 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 ends the screen operation canceling process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S66 that the No (number) of the loop counter of S64 is not 5 (when the determination of S66 is No), the sub CPU 151 uses the motor control data stored in the motor control data storage area. Discard (S67). Further, the sub CPU 151 also discards the solenoid control data stored in the solenoid control data storage area (S68).

Next, the sub CPU 151 acquires the motor control data of the motor sequence table (see, for example, FIGS. 69 to 71) corresponding to the No (number) of the loop counter of S64, and stores the data in the motor control data in the sub RAM 152. Register in the area (S69).

The sub CPU 151 acquires the solenoid control data of the solenoid sequence table corresponding to the No (number) of the loop counter of S64, registers the data in the solenoid control data storage area in the sub RAM 152 (S70), and cancels the screen operation. finish.

Here, the processing after S65 will be described in detail. The screen operation cancel process in the present embodiment continues the control based on the motor sequence table MT15 when the timing of the cancellation request is during the execution of the control based on the motor sequence table MT15 (solenoid sequence table ST15). However, if the projection surface can be smoothly stopped at an appropriate position (projection surface origin position), the cancellation request is ignored and the control based on the motor sequence table MT15 (solenoid sequence table ST15) is continued, and the motor is used. If the projection plane cannot be stopped smoothly at an appropriate position when the control based on the sequence table MT15 (solenoid sequence table ST15) is continued, the motor sequence table MT15 and the solenoid sequence table ST15 are used for other motor sequences, respectively. It is based on the idea of changing to a table and other solenoid sequence tables.

When a cancellation request occurs when the total number of pulses of the motor sequence table MT15 is between 0 and 299 (when the loop counter is No. 1), the sub CPU 151 changes the motor sequence table from MT15 to MT01 and changes the motor sequence table from MT15 to MT01. Is changed from ST15 to ST01, and then the rotary operation of the movable screen unit 700 is executed. Here, the range in which the total number of pulses is 0 to 299 corresponds to the fanning effect of step numbers 1 to 51. That is, when a cancellation request is generated during the execution of the fanning effect, the sub CPU 151 changes the motor sequence table from MT15 to MT01, changes the solenoid sequence table from ST15 to ST01, and changes the motor sequence table to MT01. Control based on and control based on the modified solenoid sequence table ST01 are started from step number 1. In this case, since the fanning effect is stopped halfway, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 is accurately stopped at the origin position of the projection surface while shortening the time required for the rotational operation of the movable screen unit 700. be able to.

When a cancellation request occurs while the total number of pulses of the motor sequence table MT15 is between 300 and 345 (when the loop counter is No. 2), even if the control based on the motor sequence table MT15 and the solenoid sequence table ST15 is continued as it is. , Any one of the plurality of projection planes 7123, 7141, 7167 can be accurately stopped at the projection plane origin position. Therefore, when the cancellation request occurs while the total number of pulses is between 300 and 345, the sub CPU 151 ignores the occurrence of the cancellation request and does not change the motor sequence table and the solenoid sequence table, so that the motor sequence is not changed. Control based on the table MT15 and the solenoid sequence table ST15 is continued. As a result, the sub CPU 151 can accurately stop any of the projection planes at the origin position of the projection plane in the shortest time. The range in which the total number of pulses is in the range of 300 to 345 is considered to be the timing at which the light-shielding piece 791 has not yet been detected by any of the optical sensors 802,804,806 after the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 is started. ..

When a cancellation request occurs while the total number of pulses of the motor sequence table MT15 is between 346 and 358 (when the loop counter is No. 3), the sub CPU 151 changes the motor sequence table from MT15 to MT20 and changes the motor sequence table from MT15 to MT20. Is changed from ST15 to ST20, and then the rotary operation of the movable screen unit 700 is executed. In the range where the total number of pulses is 346 to 358, the motor sequence table is changed from MT15 to MT01 and the solenoid sequence table is changed from ST15 to ST01 even if the control based on the motor sequence table MT15 and the solenoid sequence table ST15 is continued. Even so, it is considered that the timing is such that the projection surface 7123 corresponding to the optical sensor 802 cannot be stopped at the projection surface origin position.

Here, the major difference between the motor sequence table MT20 and the motor sequence table MT01 is that when the movable screen unit 700 is accelerated, which is the pre-stage of step number 8 for determining whether or not the light-shielding piece 791 is detected by the optical sensor 802 in constant speed rotation. The point is that step number 7 having a pulse width of 3 and a pulse number of 40 is added to (step number 7 in this embodiment). That is, the sub CPU 151 rotates the movable screen unit 700 by 40 pulses of step number 7 in addition to the number of pulses of step numbers 1 to 6, and if the motor sequence table MT15 is continued, the light-shielding piece 791 will eventually be used. Even if it should be detected by the optical sensor, it will rotate to a position beyond the detection range of the optical sensor. After that, in step number 8 of the motor sequence table MT20, constant speed rotation is performed until the light-shielding piece 791 is detected by the optical sensor 802, and the step number is based on the fact that the light-shielding piece 791 is detected by the optical sensor 802. Deceleration from 9 to step number 13 is performed. Therefore, the projection surface 7123 corresponding to the optical sensor 802 is surely stopped at the origin position of the projection surface by suppressing the occurrence of, for example, positional deviation (stopping at a position where the projection surface deviates from the origin position of the projection surface). be able to.

If a cancellation request is made at a timing when the projection surface 7123 corresponding to the optical sensor 802 cannot be stopped at the origin position of the projection surface, the light-shielding piece 791 may be detected by any optical sensor. Even so, the motor sequence table is uniformly changed from MT15 to MT20, and the solenoid sequence table is changed from ST15 to ST20 so that the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 stops at the origin position of the projection surface. .. As a result, it is not necessary to change the processing for each optical sensor that detects the light-shielding piece 791, which not only suppresses the occurrence of bugs, but also uniformly stops the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 at the origin position of the projection surface. be able to. In particular, since the sub CPU 151 does not determine which projection plane is at the projection plane origin position at the start of rotation of the movable screen unit 700, when the projection plane corresponding to the controlled gaming state stops at the projection plane origin position. Is not always. Therefore, when a cancellation request is generated at a timing when the projection surface 7123 corresponding to the optical sensor 802 cannot be stopped at the projection surface origin position, the projection surface 7123 is uniformly and accurately stopped at the projection surface origin position. By doing so, the player is prevented from giving unnecessary expectations and discouragement.

Next, when a cancellation request occurs while the total number of pulses of the motor sequence table MT15 is between 359 and 432 (when the loop counter is No. 4), the sub CPU 151 changes the motor sequence table from MT15 to MT01. After changing the solenoid sequence table from ST15 to ST01, the rotary operation of the movable screen unit 700 is executed. In the range where the total number of pulses is in the range of 359 to 432, it is considered that the shading piece 791 may be detected by any of the optical sensors 802,804,806 after the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 is started. However, when the control based on the changed motor sequence table MT01 and the solenoid sequence table ST01 is executed, the control is started from step number 1, so that the light sensor determines whether or not the light-shielding piece 791 is detected. It is considered that the light-shielding piece 791 moves out of the detection range from the optical sensor before reaching step number 7. In this way, when a cancellation request occurs while the total number of pulses is between 359 and 432, the motor sequence table is changed from MT15 to MT01 and the solenoid sequence table is changed from ST15 to ST01 to change the projection plane. The 7123 can be stopped uniformly and accurately at the origin position of the projection plane.

As described above, when the cancellation request is generated during the execution of the control of the drive mechanism 815 based on the motor sequence table MT15 and the loop counter is No1, No3 or No4, the condition for changing the motor sequence table is satisfied. That is, the loop counters No1, No3, or No4 constitute the drive data change condition. Therefore, when the loop counter is No1, No3 or No4, the drive data change condition is satisfied, and when the loop counter is No2, the drive data change condition is not satisfied.

In addition, "-1" shown in No. 5 of the cancellation check table of FIG. 76 indicates the end of the screen operation canceling process.

As described above, according to the screen operation cancellation process, even if a cancellation request is generated during the execution of the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700 based on the motor sequence table MT15, the movable screen unit 700 is set according to the timing of the cancellation request. Can be stopped properly.

Moreover, when a cancellation request is generated during the execution of the rotational operation of the movable screen unit 700 based on the motor sequence table MT15, drive data normally used (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT19) are used according to the timing of the cancellation request generation. It is possible to use the motor sequence table MT20 dedicated to the occurrence of a cancellation request only when the normally used drive data cannot be used.

When a cancellation request is generated at a timing when the projection surface 7123 corresponding to the optical sensor 802 cannot be stopped at the projection surface origin position, the movable screen unit 700 is rotated in the opposite direction, and the light-shielding piece 791 passes once. A method of executing control to stop the movable screen unit 700 based on the detection by the optical sensor is also conceivable, but in this way, the movable screen unit 700 flutters and the projection plane is placed at the origin position of the projection plane. Since it is not always possible to stop it reliably, such a method is not adopted.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the generation timing of the cancellation request is during the execution of the control based on the motor sequence table MT15 (solenoid sequence table ST15), the motor sequence table and the solenoid sequence table are each another motor sequence table. And may be changed to other solenoid sequence tables. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing of occurrence of the cancellation request is, for example, during the execution of control based on the motor sequence table MT16 (solenoid sequence table ST16), or the motor sequence table (solenoid sequence) other than the motor sequence table MT15 (solenoid sequence table ST15). The motor sequence table and the solenoid sequence table may be changed to another motor sequence table and another solenoid sequence table, respectively, when a cancellation request is generated during the execution of control based on the table). In this case, it is necessary to count the cumulative number of pulses output to the motor 812 during execution of control based on the motor sequence table other than the motor sequence table MT15 by the pulse number counting means described above.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 151 does not determine which projection surface is at the origin position of the projection surface at the start of rotation of the movable screen unit 700, but which projection surface is at the start of rotation of the movable screen unit 700. May be determined whether or not is at the origin position of the projection plane. By doing so, when a cancellation request is generated, the projection surface 7123 is not uniformly stopped at the projection surface origin position as in the present embodiment, but is at the projection surface origin position at the start of rotation of the movable screen unit 700. It is possible to stop the same projection plane as the existing projection plane at the origin position of the projection plane.

That is, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen operation cancel process in the present embodiment has the motor sequence data registered in the cancel check table and the motor sequence data registered in the cancel check table based on the cancel check table during the execution of the control based on the motor sequence table and the solenoid sequence table. It constitutes a data changing means for changing control to solenoid sequence data, a normal data changing means, and a delay data changing means. Further, based on the cancellation check table, a data maintenance means for maintaining control by the motor sequence data and the solenoid sequence data under control is configured. More specifically, the sub CPU 151 that executes the processes of steps S67 and S69 in the case of the cancel check tables No. 1 and No. 4 constitutes a normal data changing means, and executes the processes of steps S67 and S69 in the case of the cancel check table No. 3. The sub CPU 151 constitutes the delay data changing means, and the sub CPU 151 that executes the processes of steps S67 and S69 in the case of the cancellation check table No. 2 constitutes the data maintaining means.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if a cancellation request occurs during execution of control based on the motor sequence table MT15 (solenoid sequence table ST15), the projection surface is smoothly stopped at an appropriate position (projection surface origin position). When it is possible, the cancellation request is ignored and the control based on the motor sequence table MT15 is continued, but the control is not limited to this, and for example, the control based on a specific motor sequence table (for example, the motor sequence table MT15) is continued. When a cancellation request is generated during execution, a specific projection surface (for example, projection surface 7123) may be uniformly stopped at an appropriate position.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a cancellation request is generated during execution of control based on the motor sequence table MT15 (solenoid sequence table ST15), the motor sequence table MT01 or MT20 is changed according to the timing at which the cancellation request is generated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the motor sequence table may be uniformly changed to a specific motor sequence table (for example, the motor sequence table MT20).

As described above, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory control task of FIG. 68 constitutes the drive control means.

[Screen accessory control process]
A screen accessory control process executed by the sub control circuit 150 (sub CPU 151) will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72 and 75. The screen accessory control process is the process of S45 in FIG. 68. Note that FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a solenoid sequence table according to the present embodiment.

Here, the solenoid sequence table shown in FIG. 72 will be described. The solenoid sequence tables ST01 to ST20 are solenoid control data for controlling on (energized state) and off (non-energized state) of the solenoid 792 of the stopper mechanism 790 that prevents the rotation of the movable screen unit 700. The solenoid sequence table is stored in the ROM cartridge board 86.

That is, the solenoid sequence table shown in FIG. 72 constitutes the unlocking data, and the ROM cartridge substrate 86 that stores the solenoid sequence table constitutes the driving data storage means and the unlocking data storage means.

The solenoid sequence tables ST01 to ST20 correspond to the motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20 on a one-to-one basis with the same table numbers. For example, the solenoid sequence table ST01 corresponds to the motor sequence table MT01, the solenoid sequence table ST15 corresponds to the motor sequence table MT15, and the solenoid sequence table ST20 corresponds to the motor sequence table MT20. In addition to the fact that the motor sequence tables MT07 to MT14 and MT16 to MT19 are omitted in FIGS. 69 to 71, the solenoid sequence tables ST07 to ST14 and ST16 to ST19 are not shown in FIG. 72.

The solenoid sequence table ST01 will be described. The solenoid sequence table ST01 includes step numbers 1 to 3 and step number -1. In the solenoid sequence table ST01, the pulse width, the number of pulses, and the solenoid control state of the control signal of the solenoid 792 are set for each step number. Note that one pulse of the control signal has an on section of the half pulse width and an off section of the half pulse width, and the “pulse width” in FIG. 72 is the time for half a pulse (unit: ms) for convenience. Is shown. When the solenoid control state is "Hold", the solenoid 792 is turned on to electromagnetically hold the stopper pin 7944 of the stopper mechanism 790 at the upper position in the vertical stroke. In step number 1, the solenoid 792 is turned on for 40 (ms), and the stopper pin 7944 is held in the upper position during that time. The period 40 (ms) is derived by pulse width × 2 × number of pulses, that is, 10 (ms) × 2 × 2 = 40 (ms).

Further, when the solenoid control state is "+", the energization of the solenoid 792 is started. Further, when the solenoid control state is "-1", the control based on the solenoid sequence table ST01 is terminated, and the energization of the solenoid 792 is terminated. When the energization of the solenoid 792 is completed, the stopper pin 7944 moves to a lower position (a position where the gear shape portion 744 can engage with the groove 7444 (see, for example, FIG. 39)). The same applies to other solenoid sequence tables.

In step number 2 of the solenoid sequence table ST01, the solenoid 792 is kept on for a maximum of 432 pulses until the light-shielding piece 791 is detected by the optical sensor 802. When the light-shielding piece 791 is detected by the optical sensor 802, the process proceeds to step number 3, and the solenoid 792 is kept on for 420 (ms), during which the stopper pin 7944 is in the upper position (gear shape portion 744). It is held in a groove 7444 (for example, a position that does not engage with the groove 7444). The period 420 (ms) is derived from the pulse width × 2 × the number of pulses, that is, 10 (ms) × 2 × 21 = 420 (ms). After that, the stopper pin 7944 moves to the lower position.

The solenoid sequence table ST02 will be described. The difference between the solenoid sequence table ST02 and the solenoid sequence table ST01 is that in step number 2, the solenoid 792 is turned on for a maximum of 432 pulses until the light-shielding piece 791 is detected by the optical sensor 804 instead of the optical sensor 802. It is a point to be maintained. Except for this point, it is the same as the solenoid sequence table ST01.

The solenoid sequence table ST03 will be described. The difference between the solenoid sequence table ST03 and the solenoid sequence table ST01 is that in step number 2, the solenoid 792 is turned on for a maximum of 432 pulses until the light-shielding piece 791 is detected by the optical sensor 806 instead of the optical sensor 802. It is a point to be maintained. Except for this point, it is the same as the solenoid sequence table ST01.

The solenoid sequence table ST04 will be described. The difference between the solenoid sequence table ST04 and the solenoid sequence table ST01 is that in step number 3, the solenoid 792 is kept on for 440 (ms) instead of 420 (ms), during which the stopper pin 7944 is in the upper position. It is a point to be held. The period 440 (ms) is derived by the pulse width × 2 × the number of pulses, that is, 10 (ms) × 2 × 22 = 440 (ms). Other points are the same as those of the solenoid sequence table ST01.

The solenoid sequence table ST05 will be described. The difference between the solenoid sequence table ST05 and the solenoid sequence table ST02 is that in step number 3, the solenoid 792 is kept on for 440 (ms) instead of 420 (ms), during which the stopper pin 7944 is in the upper position. It is a point to be held. The period 440 (ms) is derived by the pulse width × 2 × the number of pulses, that is, 10 (ms) × 2 × 22 = 440 (ms). Other points are the same as those of the solenoid sequence table ST01.

The solenoid sequence table ST06 will be described. The difference between the solenoid sequence table ST06 and the solenoid sequence table ST03 is that in step number 3, the solenoid 792 is kept on for 440 (ms) instead of 420 (ms), during which the stopper pin 7944 is in the upper position. It is a point to be held. The period 440 (ms) is derived by the pulse width × 2 × the number of pulses, that is, 10 (ms) × 2 × 22 = 440 (ms). Other points are the same as the solenoid sequence (ST01).

The solenoid sequence table ST15 will be described. The difference between the solenoid sequence table ST15 and the solenoid sequence table ST01 is that in step number 2, not only the optical sensor 802 but also the light-shielding piece 791 is detected by any of the optical sensors 802 to 806, instead of the maximum number of pulses of 432. The point is that the on state of the solenoid 792 is maintained for a maximum of 458 pulses. Other points are the same as those of the solenoid sequence table ST01.

The solenoid sequence table ST20 will be described. The difference between the solenoid sequence table ST20 and the solenoid sequence table ST01 is that the solenoid 792 is used for 480 (ms) in the step (step number 2) before step number 3 for determining whether or not the light-shielding piece 791 is detected by the optical sensor 802. Is turned on, during which the stopper pin 7944 is held in the upper position, and in step number 3 for determining whether or not the light shielding piece 791 is detected by the optical sensor 802, until the optical sensor 802 is detected, the maximum pulse is 432. The point is that the on state of the solenoid 792 is maintained for a maximum of 950 pulses. Other points are the same as the solenoid sequence (ST01). The period 480 (ms) of step number 2 is derived from the pulse width × 24 × the number of pulses, that is, 10 (ms) × 2 × 24 = 480 (ms). Further, the period 420 (ms) of step number 4 is derived by the pulse width × 21 × the number of pulses, that is, 10 (ms) × 2 × 21 = 420 (ms).

In the screen accessory control process, the sub CPU 151 controls the motor 812 based on any of the motor sequence tables MT0 to MT20 (motor control data), and has a one-to-one correspondence with the running motor sequence table. The solenoid 792 is controlled based on the solenoid sequence table (solenoid control data) having the same table number.

Specifically, for example, when the effect of the motor sequence table MT01 is performed, as shown in FIG. 75, the sub CPU 151 first statically switches the motor 812 for 300 ms in step number 1 of the motor sequence table MT01. Along with the constant hold (electromagnetically static hold), the solenoid 792 is energized (the solenoid 792 is turned on) to hold the stopper pin 7944 in the upper position. Next, the sub CPU 151 rotates the motor 812 in step numbers 2 to 6 to accelerate the rotation in the positive direction. Next, the sub CPU 151 rotates the motor 812 at a constant speed until the optical sensor 802 detects the light-shielding piece 791 in step number 7. Next, the sub CPU 151 decelerates the rotation of the motor 812 from the time point t (see FIG. 75) when the optical sensor 802 detects the light shielding piece 791 (step numbers 8 to 12). Next, the sub CPU 151 causes the motor 812 to be statically held (electromagnetically statically held) at step number 13. Next, the sub CPU 151 maintains the electromagnetic statically indeterminate hold state of the motor 812 from the start of the electromagnetic statically indeterminate hold of the motor 812 until a predetermined time (420 ms in the example shown in FIG. 75) elapses. As a result, the first projection plane reference groove is stationary at the groove origin position, and the stopper pin 9444 (see, for example, FIG. 38) and the first projection plane reference groove face each other. In this way, when the stopper pin 9444 and the first projection plane reference groove face each other, the energization to the solenoid 792 is turned off and the stopper pin 7944 is lowered, and the stopper pin 7944 is referred to by the first projection plane. The rotation of the movable screen unit 700 is stopped in a state where the projection surface 7123 is stopped at the origin position of the projection surface by engaging with the groove.

In this way, the sub CPU 151 controls the motor 812 based on the motor sequence table, and controls the solenoid 792 based on the solenoid sequence table having a one-to-one correspondence with the motor sequence table, whereby the plurality of projection planes. With any one of 7123, 7141, and 7167 stopped at the origin position of the projection surface, the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700 can be stopped (locked) by the stopper pin 7944. That is, immediately after the start of the electromagnetic statically indeterminate hold of the motor 812, the motor 812 is not completely stopped, and it takes a certain amount of time to completely stop the motor 812. Therefore, by controlling the stopper pin 7944 to descend while maintaining the electromagnetic statically indeterminate hold state of the motor 812 for a predetermined period, the stopper pin 7944 can be moved from the first projection surface reference groove to the third projection surface reference groove. One of the plurality of projection planes 7123, 714, 7167 can be reliably stopped at the projection plane origin position, and the stopped state can be maintained. ..

That is, the gear shape portion 744 and the stopper mechanism 790 having a function of locking the movable screen unit 700 in a state where any one of the plurality of projection surfaces 7123, 714, 7167 is stopped at the projection surface origin position are engaged. It constitutes a stop mechanism. Further, the groove 7444 of the gear shape portion 744 constitutes a groove forming member. Further, the stopper pin 7944 that can engage with the groove 7444 when the solenoid 792 is turned off and descends constitutes an engaging member.

In the present embodiment, the stopper 794 is arranged at the upper position of the groove origin position, the energization to the solenoid 792 is turned off, the stopper pin 7944 is lowered, and the stopper 794 and the groove 7444 are engaged with each other. ing. According to this, it is preferable in that the rotational operation of the movable screen unit 700 can be stopped without energizing the solenoid 792, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the energization of the solenoid 792 is turned on, the stopper 794 is grooved 7444. The stopper 794 and the groove 7444 may be engaged with each other.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700 is stopped by engaging the groove 7444 at the groove origin position with the stopper 794, but the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700 is stopped. The embodiment is not limited to this, as long as the stopped state of the projection plane can be maintained at the origin position of the projection plane, and various embodiments can be considered.

Even when the control based on the motor sequence tables MT02 to MT20 is executed, the solenoid sequence tables ST02 to ST20 have a one-to-one correspondence as in the case where the control based on the motor sequence table MT01 is executed. By executing the control based on the control, the same effect as when the control based on the motor sequence table MT01 is executed can be obtained.

Further, each of the motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20 is a step of rotating at a constant speed until the light-shielding piece 791 is detected by the optical sensor 802 (or the optical sensor 804,806) (for example, in the case of the motor sequence table MT20, a step). It has the number 8). Similarly, for the solenoid sequence tables ST01 to ST20, the step of holding the stopper pin 7944 in the upper position until the light shielding piece 791 is detected by the optical sensor 802 (or the optical sensor 804,806) (for example, the solenoid sequence). The table ST20 has a step number 3). Therefore, regardless of the position of the movable screen unit 700 in the rotation direction when the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 is started, when the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700 is completed, the sub CPU 151 has a plurality of projection surfaces 7123, It is possible to always stop any one of 7141 and 7167 at the origin position of the projection plane. For example, the projection surface may be displaced from the origin position of the projection surface, such as when the pachislot is introduced into the hall or when the hall clerk turns the movable screen unit 700 by hand. Even when the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700 is started in such a state, the sub CPU 151 is among the plurality of projection surfaces 7123, 714, 7167 when the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700 is completed. Can always be stopped at the origin position of the projection plane.

The pulse width and the number of pulses in FIG. 72 are verified based on the calculated values in the design so that the movable screen unit 700 can be stopped while the projection plane is at the origin position of the projection plane and the stopped state can be maintained. It is a derived value.

By the way, in general, if the rotation of the motor 812 is stopped, the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 is stopped. Therefore, unless an external force acts on the movable screen unit 700, the stopper pin 9444 (for example, FIG. 38) can be stopped from rotating the movable screen unit 700 without engaging the groove 7444 (see, for example, FIG. 39) of the gear shape portion 744. However, in the present embodiment, since there is a weight difference between the projection surfaces 7123, 714, 7167, the rotational balance becomes unbalanced, and there is a possibility that a rotational force acts on the movable screen unit 700. As described above, the center of gravity in the longitudinal direction of the prism screen 710 is brought closer to the rotation axis 722 so that the two are coaxial as much as possible to prevent the rotation balance from becoming unbalanced as much as possible. It is difficult to completely eliminate the imbalance. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after stopping any one of the projection surfaces 7123, 714, 7167 of the movable screen unit 700 at the origin position of the projection surface, the stopper pin 7944 is engaged with the groove 7444 to engage the projection surface. With any one of 7123, 7141, and 7167 stopped at the origin position of the projection plane, the rotational operation of the movable screen unit 700 can be reliably stopped without energizing the motor 812. Although it is possible to stop the rotational operation of the movable screen unit 700 by statically holding the motor 812 after stopping the projection surface of the movable screen unit 700 at the origin position of the projection surface, the motor This is not preferable because the 812 may overheat and the life of the motor 812 may be shortened.

[Focus change process]
The focus change process executed by the sub-control circuit 150 (sub-CPU 151) will be described with reference to FIG. 77. The focus change process is the process of S46 in FIG. 68. Note that FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the focus change process in the present embodiment.

In the pachi-slot machine of the present embodiment, as one aspect of the effect that the player expects that the gaming state may shift from the general gaming state to the advantageous state (for example, ART gaming state, bonus gaming state), the main CPU 101 There is a lock effect performed by. This lock effect is executed, for example, when the main CPU 101 wins a lottery for various lock effects executed based on the result of the internal winning combination. At the time of executing the lock effect, the main CPU 101 invalidates the detection by, for example, the BET switch 77, the start switch 79, and the stop switch (not shown) for a time based on the winning contents. When the lock effect is performed, it may shift to an advantageous state at the end of the lock effect, but it does not necessarily shift to the advantageous state, and the general gaming state is maintained after the lock effect ends. In some cases. That is, in the present embodiment, when the main CPU 101 wins various lock effects, the main CPU 101 generates an invalidation period for invalidating the player's operation for a time based on the winning content at the start or end of the game. Configure possible operation invalidation means.

As described above, the main control circuit 90 includes a fluctuation control means, a stop control means, a main CPU 101 constituting an operation invalidation means, and a first serial communication circuit 114 constituting an information transmission means. It constitutes the first control means.

The focus change process is a process of focusing the image light projected from the projector 213 when the gaming state is changed. In the present embodiment, since each projection surface 7123, 714, 7167 corresponds to the gaming state (the projection surface corresponding to the gaming state is located at the origin position of the projection surface), when the gaming state is changed. , The rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700 is performed, and the projection plane located at the origin position of the projection plane is changed. However, when the lock effect is executed by the main CPU 101, the focus of the projector 213 is not adjusted until the lock effect is completed, and the focus of the projector 213 is based on the end of the lock effect. The control to match is executed.

The reason why the control for focusing the projector 213 is executed according to the change in the gaming state is as follows. That is, in the present embodiment, since the shape differs depending on the projection surface 7123, 714, 7167, the projection is performed from the projector 213 (more specifically, the reflection mirror 237) depending on which projection surface is at the origin position of the projection surface. The distance to the surface is different. Therefore, it is necessary to perform a process of focusing the projector 213 according to the projection surface at the origin position of the projection surface. However, when the lock effect is executed by the main CPU 101, if the process of focusing the projector 213 is executed before the lock effect is finished, the player can grasp the game state after the lock effect is finished. There is a risk that it will end up. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the projector 213 is not focused until the lock effect is completed, but the projector 213 is focused based on the end of the lock effect.

As a method of preventing the projector 213 from focusing until the lock effect is completed, the focus data corresponds to the projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7123) according to the gaming state immediately before the lock effect is started. A method of using focus data and a method of using focus data that does not correspond to any of the projection planes 7123, 714, 7167 can be considered, but any of them may be adopted.

As shown in FIG. 77, first, in the sub CPU 151, whether or not there is a screen change, that is, the projection plane (for example, the projection plane 7123) at the origin position of the projection plane is another projection plane (for example, the projection plane). It is determined whether or not the 7141 or the projection surface 7167) is changed (that is, whether or not the gaming state is changed) (S81). If it is determined in S81 that there is no screen change (NO determination in S81), the sub CPU 151 ends the focus change process. The determination of whether or not the screen is changed, which is executed by the sub CPU 151, is based on the game state information transmitted from the main CPU 101. That is, the command data transmitted from the main control circuit 90 (first serial communication circuit 114) to the sub control circuit 150 includes game state information. Of course, this game state information also includes the game state information after the lock effect is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S81 that there is a change in the screen (when the determination in S81 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not the lock effect that triggers the transition to an advantageous gaming state has ended. Determine (S82). If it is determined in S82 that the lock effect has not been completed (when the determination in S82 is No), the sub CPU 151 ends the focus change process. The determination of whether or not the lock effect executed by the sub CPU 151 has ended is based on the lock effect end information transmitted from the main CPU 101.

The main CPU 101 may not execute the lock effect, and the projection plane stopped at the projection plane origin position may be changed due to the change in the gaming state. In this case, the sub CPU 151 is locked in S82. After confirming that the production is not executed, proceed to S83.

On the other hand, in S82, when the sub CPU 151 determines that the lock effect has ended or the lock effect has not started (when the determination in S82 is Yes), the screen member after the change is the first. It is determined whether or not the screen member is the first screen member 712 (S83). In S83, when it is determined that the screen member after the change is not the first screen member 712 (when the determination in S83 is No), the sub CPU 151 shifts the process to S85.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S83 that the screen member after the change is the first screen member 712 (when the determination in S83 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 performs the focus A setting transmission process (S84). The focus A setting transmission process is a process of transmitting focus data for aligning the focus of the projector 213 with the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 to a projector substrate (not shown). After S84, the sub CPU 151 ends the focus change process.

In S85, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not the screen member after the change is the second screen member 714. If it is determined in S85 that the screen member after the change is not the second screen member 714 (when the determination in S85 is No), the sub CPU 151 shifts the process to S87.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S85 that the screen member after the change is the second screen member 714 (when the determination in S85 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 performs the focus B setting transmission process (S86). The focus B setting transmission process is a process of transmitting focus data for aligning the focus of the projector 213 with the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 to a projector substrate (not shown). After S84, the sub CPU 151 ends the focus change process.

In S87, the sub CPU 151 performs the focus C setting transmission process. The focus C setting transmission process is a process of transmitting focus data for aligning the focus of the projector with the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716 to a projector substrate (not shown). After S87, the sub CPU 151 ends the focus change process.

That is, when it is determined that the sub CPU 151 (more specifically, at least when it is determined that the screen member is changed (when it is determined that the gaming state is changed)), the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory control task, a predetermined display area (for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is changed). , A sub that can output the focus data according to the changed gaming state to the display means (for example, the projector 213, the projector board) as the focus data of the effect image displayed on the projection surface stopped at the origin position of the projection surface). The CPU 151) constitutes a focus data output means. Then, even if it is determined that the gaming state is changed, the sub CPU 151 constituting the focus data output means receives the start information of the invalidation period (for example, the lock period), and the invalidation is performed. Until the end of the period, the focus data according to the changed gaming state is not output, and based on the end of the invalidation period, the focus data according to the changed gaming state is output to the display means. ..

As described above, the sub control circuit 150 receives the command transmitted by the main control circuit 90, and is capable of executing control related to the effect based on the received command, and the focus data output. It has a sub CPU 15 that constitutes the means, and constitutes a second control means.

According to this focus change process, when the lock effect that triggers the transition of the gaming state from the general gaming state to the advantageous gaming state (for example, ART gaming state, bonus gaming state) is performed, until the locked state ends. During that time, the focus of the projector 213 can be prevented from focusing on the projection plane. That is, the focus change process by the sub CPU 151 is executed after the lock effect is completed, and it becomes difficult for the player to detect the game state after the lock effect is completed during the execution of the lock effect. The decrease can be suppressed.

The execution timing of the focus change process executed by the sub CPU 151 may be any of the following. For example, if the lock effect start command and the lock effect end command are transmitted separately from the main CPU 101 to the sub CPU 151, the sub CPU 15 receives the lock effect start command and then the lock effect. Focus change processing can be performed based on the reception of the end command of. Further, when the lock effect start command and the lock effect end command are simultaneously transmitted from the main CPU 101 to the sub CPU 151 (for example, when the lock effect start command is transmitted, the lock effect execution period information is also transmitted. In the case of), the sub CPU 15 can perform the focus change process based on the elapse of the execution period of the lock effect after receiving the lock effect start command.

Further, it is preferable that the focus A setting transmission process (S84), the focus B setting transmission process (S86), and the focus C setting transmission process (S87) are executed substantially at the same time as the end of the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700. This is because if one of the processing of focusing the image light projected from the projector 213 and the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700 is completed earlier than the other processing, the changed processing at that time is performed. This is because there is a risk that the gaming state will be detected.

Further, when the focus change process is performed, the process of changing the image light projected from the projector 213 is also executed (although it is changed to the image light corresponding to the game state after the change), such image light. It is preferable that the process of changing the focus A setting transmission process (S84), the focus B setting transmission process (S86), or the focus C setting transmission process (S87) is executed almost at the same time. This is because if either the process of changing the video light or the process of focusing the video light projected from the projector 213 ends earlier, the game state after the change may be detected at that time. Because there is.

[Expandability of other gaming machines according to the present embodiment (first embodiment, second embodiment)]
In the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, the player's medal insertion operation (that is, the operation of inserting a hand-held medal into the medal insertion slot 14 or the credited medal is inserted into the MAX bet button 15a or the 1-bet button 15b. If the game is started by (operation of inserting) and the medal is paid out when the game is finished, the hopper device 51 is driven and the medal is paid out from the medal payout outlet 24, or the credit is paid. The form to be used has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, the present invention relates to all forms in which a player inputs a game medium necessary for a game, a game is performed based on the game medium, and a privilege is given based on the result of the game (for example, a medal is paid out). Can be applied. That is, not only the game medium is input (hanged) by the physical movement of the player and the game medium is paid out, but also the main control circuit 90 (main control board 71) itself is the game medium owned by the player. It may be possible to play a game without a medal by electromagnetically managing the above. Further, it may be a game medium management device that is mounted (connected) to the main control circuit 90 (main control board 71) and manages the game medium to electromagnetically manage the game medium owned by the player. ..

In this case, the gaming medium management device is a device having a ROM and an RWM (or RAM) and provided in the gaming machine, and is bidirectionally communicated with an external gaming medium handling device (not shown) via a predetermined interface. It is possible to connect and win a prize (that is, an operation of providing a game medium necessary for a player to perform a game medium lending operation (that is, an operation of providing a game medium necessary for a player to perform a game medium loading operation) or a role related to a game medium payout operation (that is, an operation of providing a game medium). When the winning combination is established), the operation of paying out the game medium (that is, the operation of acquiring the game medium necessary for paying out the game medium to the player) or the game medium used for the game is used. It suffices that the operation of recording electromagnetically can be performed. Further, the game media management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media possessed on the front surface of the pachi-slot machine 1, for example, based on the management result of the number of game media. A number display device (not shown) may be provided to manage the number of game media displayed on the possessed game medium number display device. That is, the game medium management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, it is desirable that the game medium management device has the following performances (a) to (c). B) Performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, b) Recording in addition to the case where the player directly operates Performance that cannot reduce the number of game media that have been played, c) If an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device, it must be via the external connection terminal board. , Ability that the player cannot transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from mobile terminals, other operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the game medium handling device side It may be provided (neither is shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game medium handling device to the game medium management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game media management device to the game medium handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device discharges a recording medium recording the number of game media. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the gaming media are transmitted to the gaming media handling device, but only the number of gaming media desired by the player is transmitted on the gaming machine or the gaming media handling device side, and the gaming medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, the recording medium is not limited to being discharged, and cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game hall, storing it in the member recording medium, and making it possible to replay the game at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, it is possible to execute a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable data communication to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown). May be good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that only the player can know may be set, or the player may be stored by an imaging means provided in the game machine or the game medium handling device.

As described above, the game medium management device may be capable of playing games only without a medal, or the game medium is inserted (hanged) by the physical movement of the player, and the game medium is played. It may be a form in which the game is paid out, a form in which the game is possible without a medal, or a form in which the game is possible in both forms. In this case, the game medium management device may adopt a method of directly controlling the selector 66 and the hopper device 51 described above, or these are controlled by the main control circuit 90 (main control board 71). Based on the transmission of the control result, a method is adopted that enables control in which the total number of game media that the player can use for the game is recorded by an electromagnetic method and displayed. You can also do it.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 is described. However, in the slot machine and the enclosed game machine using the above-mentioned game ball, the game medium management device is similarly provided and the player It is also possible to manage the game medium of.

As described above, by providing the above-mentioned game medium management device, it is possible to reduce the number of selectors 66, hopper devices 51, etc. inside the game machine as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game. Not only can the cost and manufacturing cost be reduced, but also the player can be prevented from coming into direct contact with the gaming medium, the gaming environment can be improved, noise can be reduced, and the number of devices can be reduced. It also reduces the power consumption of. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot and payout port of the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In the above embodiment, the pachislot gaming machine has been described as an example of the gaming machine according to the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine according to the present invention is, for example, a pachinko gaming machine. There may be.

<Supplementary note (summary of the invention relating to the structure in the second embodiment)>
[1st to 8th gaming machines]
Conventionally, a game called a pachislot machine equipped with a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols on each surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "start operation") after the game medium such as medals and coins has been inserted into the game machine, and all reels are rotated. Outputs a signal requesting a start. The stop switch detects that the stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation"), and outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of the corresponding reel. do. The stepping motor transfers its driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as "internal lottery process") is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as "internal winning combination") is performed. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and the combination of symbols (display combination) related to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the combination of the symbols. As an example of the privilege given to the player, the payout of the game medium (medals, etc.) and the operation of the re-game (hereinafter, also referred to as "replay") in which the internal lottery process is performed again without consuming the game medium. , The operation of a bonus game that increases the chances of paying out game media can be mentioned.

By the way, a gaming machine including a projector that projects video light toward the front has been proposed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187444). In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187444, the image light projected from the projector is reflected to the back side of the game machine main body, and the reflected image light is projected as a first projected member. It is provided with a second projected member. Then, the image light representing the two-dimensional image is projected on the projection surface of the first projected member, and the image light representing the three-dimensional image is projected on the projection surface of the second projected member. Therefore, it is possible to perform a novel effect that gives a three-dimensional effect and depth to the image.

(First issue)
However, in recent years, by effectively exerting the function peculiar to the gaming machine that the image is projected by the image light projected from the projector, the visual effect of the image is higher than before, and the player's performance is higher. It is required to enhance the interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to preferably enhance the interest by producing a production having a higher visual effect.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 1-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[1-1 game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a projection means capable of projecting image light (for example, a projector 213) and a plurality of projection areas on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. A columnar movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having a , A drive mechanism 815, a large diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear shape portion 744), and the movable projected member driving means is a projection of the plurality of projection regions (for example, a first screen member 712). The movable projected member is stopped so that an image is projected on the projection area of any one of the surface 7123, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). Possible stopping means (eg, stopper mechanism 790 and gear shape portion 744) and the image projected on one projection area of the plurality of projection areas and other projection areas adjacent to the one projection area. A rotating means (eg, for example) capable of changing the projection area from the one projection area to the other projection area by rotating the movable projected member in the circumferential direction so that any of the projected images can be visually recognized. It is characterized by having a drive mechanism 815 and a large diameter gear 742).

According to the game machine of (1) above, the columnar movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) has a simple configuration of rotating in the circumferential direction, and is multifaceted using a 360-degree outer peripheral surface. The image and other images projected on one projection area (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712) by switching a part of the projection surface on which the image is projected (projection surface portion excluding the lower screen 7082). It is possible to realize an effect in which both the image projected on the projection area (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 or the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) can be visually recognized, and the interest can be enhanced. .. Such an effect with high visual visual effect cannot be realized by, for example, a liquid crystal display, but can be realized only by utilizing a function peculiar to a gaming machine that allows an image to be projected by projecting image light. ..

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) projects an image by the image light projected from the projection means (for example, the projector 213). As the plurality of projection regions, there are three projection regions (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). , It is characterized by having a triangular columnar shape surrounded by the three projection areas.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, for example, when the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is a polygonal columnar shape surrounded by four or more projection areas, the projection means (for example, for example). When the projection area on which the image is projected is changed from one projection area to another by the image light projected from the projector 213), the projection irrelevant between one projection area and the other projection area is performed. It may be necessary to go through the area. In this regard, the movable projected member is in three projection regions (eg, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). In the case of an enclosed triangular column, the movable projected member can be rotated about 120 degrees in the forward or reverse direction, and one projection area can be immediately converted to another projection area without going through an irrelevant projection area. It is possible to change to.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides the first and second gaming machines having the following configurations.

[1-2 game machines]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a projection means capable of projecting image light (for example, a projector 213) and a plurality of projection areas on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. A columnar movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having a , A drive mechanism 815, a large diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear shape portion 744), and the movable projected member driving means is a projection of the plurality of projection regions (for example, a first screen member 712). The movable projected member is stopped so that an image is projected on the projection area of any one of the surface 7123, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). Possible stopping means (eg, stopper mechanism 790 and gear shape portion 744) and the image projected on one projection area of the plurality of projection areas and other projection areas adjacent to the one projection area. A rotating means (eg, for example) capable of changing the projection area from the one projection area to the other projection area by rotating the movable projected member in the circumferential direction so that any of the projected images can be visually recognized. It has a drive mechanism 815 and a large-diameter gear 742), and the movable projected member has a plurality of projection regions having different three-dimensional shapes of the projection surface on which the image is projected in the circumferential direction. And.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the columnar movable projected member has a simple configuration in which the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is rotated in the circumferential direction, and the outer peripheral surface of 360 degrees is formed. By using it to switch the projection planes from multiple sides, it is possible to realize an effect in which both the image projected on one projection area and the image projected on the other projection area can be visually recognized, and the interest can be enhanced. Such an effect with high visual visual effect cannot be realized by, for example, a liquid crystal display, but can be realized only by utilizing a function peculiar to a gaming machine that allows an image to be projected by projecting image light. .. Moreover, the movable projected member has a plurality of projection regions (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 and the second screen member 714) having different solid (undulating) shapes of the projection surface on which the image light is projected. Since the projection surface 7141 of the above and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) are provided in the circumferential direction, the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface can visually recognize any of the plurality of projection areas. It is possible to perform high-quality production.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the plurality of projection regions (for example, the projection surface of the first screen member 712) that the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) has in the circumferential direction. 7123, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) have a flat shape (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712) and a convex shape (for example, a third). 7167), concave shape (for example, projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714), and a three-dimensional shape combining these, each having the projection surface having a different shape. ..

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the projection surface on which the image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means (for example, the projector 213) has a flat shape (for example, the projection surface of the first screen member 712). 7123), a convex shape (for example, the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716), a concave shape (for example, the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716), and a three-dimensional shape combining these. Since it can be changed to, it is possible to produce a higher visual effect than ever before.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides the first to third gaming machines having the following configurations.

[No. 1-3 gaming machines]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a projection means capable of projecting image light (for example, a projector 213) and a plurality of projection areas on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. A columnar movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having a , A drive mechanism 815, a large diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear shape portion 744), and the movable projected member driving means is a projection of the plurality of projection regions (for example, a first screen member 712). The movable projected member is stopped so that an image is projected on the projection area of any one of the surface 7123, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). Possible stopping means (eg, stopper mechanism 790 and gear shape portion 744) and the image projected on one projection area of the plurality of projection areas and other projection areas adjacent to the one projection area. The movable projected member is rotated in the circumferential direction with a predetermined axis as a rotation axis (for example, rotation axis 722) so that any of the projected images can be visually recognized, and the projection area is set to the one projection area. The movable projected member has a rotating means (for example, a drive mechanism 815 and a large-diameter gear 742) that can be changed from the above to the other projection area, and the movable projected member has a three-dimensional shape of a projection surface on which the image is projected. Has a plurality of different projection regions in the circumferential direction, and has a predetermined weight, and makes it possible to bring the center of gravity of the movable projected member closer to the rotation axis (for example, weight members 7326, 7366). ).

According to the game machine of (1) above, it has a simple configuration in which a columnar movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) is simply rotated in the circumferential direction, and is multifaceted using a 360-degree outer peripheral surface. By switching the projection plane, it is possible to realize an effect in which both the image light projected on one projection area and the image light projected on the other projection area can be visually recognized, and the interest can be enhanced. Such an effect with high visual visual effect cannot be realized by, for example, a liquid crystal display, but can be realized only by utilizing a function peculiar to a gaming machine that allows an image to be projected by projecting image light. .. Moreover, the movable projected member circles a plurality of projection regions (for example, a drive mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear shape portion 744) in which the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface on which the image light is projected is different. Since it is held in the direction, it is possible to produce an effect with a higher visual visual effect, such that the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface can visually recognize any of a plurality of projection areas.

By the way, when the movable projected member has a plurality of projection regions having different three-dimensional shapes of the projection surface on which the image light is projected in the circumferential direction, the center of gravity and the rotation axis of the movable projected member (for example, the rotation axis 722). ), And the rotational balance of the movable projected member may become unbalanced. Therefore, by having a weight member that makes it possible to bring the center of gravity of the movable projected member and the axis of rotation closer to each other, there are a plurality of projection regions in the circumferential direction in which the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface on which the image light is projected is different. However, it is possible to suppress the unbalanced rotational balance of the movable projected member, and it is possible to preferably perform an effect with a higher visual visual effect.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the plurality of projection regions (for example, the projection surface of the first screen member 712) that the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) has in the circumferential direction. 7123, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167) of the third screen member 716 are projections having a flat shape, a convex shape, a concave shape, or a three-dimensional shape combining these, which are different from each other. It is characterized by having a surface.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the projection surface on which the image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means (for example, the projector 213) has a flat shape, a convex shape, a concave shape, and a solid obtained by combining these. Since it can be changed to any of the shapes in various ways, it is possible to produce an unprecedented visual effect. Moreover, even if the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface can be variously changed to one of a flat shape, a convex shape, a concave shape, and a three-dimensional shape combining these, a movable projected member (for example, a movable screen). Since the unit 700) has a weight member (for example, weight members 7326 and 7366) that makes it possible to bring the center of gravity closer to the axis of rotation, it is possible to suitably perform an effect having a higher visual visual effect.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 2-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[2-1 gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a projection means capable of projecting image light (for example, a projector 213) and a plurality of projection areas on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. A columnar movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having a , A drive mechanism 815, a large diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear shape portion 744), and the movable projected member driving means is a projection of the plurality of projection regions (for example, a first screen member 712). The movable projected member is stopped so that an image is projected on the projection area of any one of the surface 7123, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). Possible stopping means (eg, stopper mechanism 790 and gear shape portion 744) and the image projected on one projection area of the plurality of projection areas and other projection areas adjacent to the one projection area. A rotating means (eg, for example) capable of changing the projection area from the one projection area to the other projection area by rotating the movable projected member in the circumferential direction so that any of the projected images can be visually recognized. It has a drive mechanism 815 and a large diameter gear 742), the stopping means has an actuating member (for example, a stopper mechanism 790) that can be actuated in the vertical direction, and the movable projected member has the actuating member. An engaging member (for example, a protrusion) formed along the circumferential direction at predetermined angles with an engaging portion (for example, a gear shape portion 744) to which the operating member can engage when the member operates in the vertical direction. 7442).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is positioned at a desired position with a simple configuration in which the operating member (for example, the stopper mechanism 790) is operated in the vertical direction. You can stop it with. In particular, if the above-mentioned predetermined angle (the angle at which the engaging member (for example, the protrusion 7442) is formed along the circumferential direction) is small, the movable projected member is projected to an arbitrary position (for example, one projection area). The image is projected by projecting the image light, such as stopping at the position where both the image light to be projected and the image light projected to the other projection area adjacent to the one projection area can be visually recognized. It is possible to produce a higher visual visual effect by making the best use of the functions peculiar to the gaming machine, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) projects an image by the image light projected from the projection means (for example, the projector 213). As the plurality of projection regions to be formed, there are three projection regions (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). However, it is characterized by having a triangular columnar shape surrounded by the three projection areas.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, for example, when the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is a polygonal columnar shape surrounded by four or more projection areas, the projection means (for example, for example). When changing the projection area on which the image light projected from the projector 213) is projected from one projection area to another, it goes through an irrelevant projection area between one projection area and another projection area. It may be necessary to do so. In this regard, the movable projected member is in three projection regions (eg, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). In the case of an enclosed triangular column, the movable projected member can be rotated about 120 degrees in the forward or reverse direction, and one projection area can be immediately converted to another projection area without going through an irrelevant projection area. It is possible to change to.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a second-second gaming machine having the following configuration.

[2-2 gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a projection means capable of projecting image light (for example, a projector 213) and a plurality of projection areas on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. A columnar movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having a , A drive mechanism 815, a large diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear shape portion 744), and the movable projected member driving means is a projection of the plurality of projection regions (for example, a first screen member 712). The movable projected member is stopped so that an image is projected on the projection area of any one of the surface 7123, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). Possible stopping means (eg, stopper mechanism 790 and gear shape portion 744) and the image projected on one projection area of the plurality of projection areas and other projection areas adjacent to the one projection area. A rotating means (eg, for example) capable of changing the projection area from the one projection area to the other projection area by rotating the movable projected member in the circumferential direction so that any of the projected images can be visually recognized. It has a drive mechanism 815 and a large-diameter gear 742), the stopping means has a rod-shaped actuating member (for example, a stopper pin 7944) that can be actuated in the vertical direction, and the movable projected member is the rod-shaped. A rib (for example, a protrusion 7442) protruding outward in diameter at a predetermined angle is provided in the circumferential direction so that the tip of the rod-shaped actuating member can be engaged when the actuating member of the rod-shaped actuating member is actuated in the vertical direction. It has an engaging member (for example, a gear-shaped portion 744) formed along the above, and the rod-shaped operating member is characterized in that the corner portion of the tip portion is chamfered.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the rod-shaped operating member is formed into a rib (for example, a protrusion 7442) and a rib by simply operating the rod-shaped operating member (for example, the stopper pin 7944) in the vertical direction. The movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) can be stopped at a desired position by engaging with the movable screen unit 700. Moreover, since the corner of the tip of the rod-shaped operating member is chamfered, the movable projected member moves in the circumferential direction even if it is caught without being engaged between the ribs. Sometimes the ribs push up the rod-shaped actuating member, making it possible to prevent catching.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a second-third gaming machine having the following configuration.

[No. 2-3 gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a projection means capable of projecting image light (for example, a projector 213) and a plurality of projection areas on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. A columnar movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having a , A drive mechanism 815, a large diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear shape portion 744), and the movable projected member driving means is a projection of the plurality of projection regions (for example, a first screen member 712). The movable projected member is stopped so that an image is projected on the projection area of any one of the surface 7123, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). Possible stopping means (eg, stopper mechanism 790 and gear shape portion 744) and the image projected on one projection area of the plurality of projection areas and other projection areas adjacent to the one projection area. A rotating means (eg, for example) capable of changing the projection area from the one projection area to the other projection area by rotating the movable projected member in the circumferential direction so that any of the projected images can be visually recognized. It has a drive mechanism 815 and a large-diameter gear 742), the stopping means has a rod-shaped actuating member (for example, a stopper pin 7944) that can be actuated in the vertical direction, and the movable projected member is the rod-shaped. A rib (for example, a protrusion 7442) that projects outward in the radial direction at a predetermined angle is circumferential so that the tip of the rod-shaped actuating member can be engaged when the actuating member of the rod-shaped actuating member is actuated in the vertical direction. The rib has an engaging member (for example, a gear shape portion 744) formed along the direction, and the radial outer portion of the rib formed on the engaging member is circumferential as compared with the radial inner portion. It is characterized by being formed so as to swell.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the rod-shaped operating member is formed into a rib (for example, a protrusion 7442) and a rib by simply operating the rod-shaped operating member (for example, the stopper pin 7944) in the vertical direction. The movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) can be stopped at a desired position by engaging with the movable screen unit 700. Moreover, since the rib formed on the engaging member is formed so that the radial outer portion bulges in the circumferential direction as compared with the radial inner portion, once engaged between the rib and the rib, The engagement does not easily come off, and the movable projected member can be prevented from unintentionally rotating.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a third gaming machine having the following configuration.

[Third gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a projection means capable of projecting image light (for example, a projector 213) and a plurality of projection areas on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. A columnar movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having , Drive mechanism 815, large diameter gear 742, stopper mechanism 790 and gear shape portion 744), and a position detecting means (for example, an optical sensor unit) capable of detecting the position of the movable projected member in the circumferential direction. The movable projected member driving means rotates the movable projected member in response to the detection by the position detecting means that the movable projected member is at a specific position in the circumferential direction. The position detecting means has a stopping means (for example, a stopper mechanism 790 and a gear shape portion 744) capable of stopping at a predetermined position, and the position detecting means is a longitudinal shielding member extending in the circumferential direction (for example, a light shielding piece 791). ) And a sensor that can detect the passage of the shielding member, and the shielding member and the sensor are configured to rotate relatively with the rotation of the movable projected member, and the stop. The means is configured to stop the rotation of the movable projected member in response to the detection of the passage of the shielding member by the sensor, and the circumferential length of the shielding member is the sensor. Even if the rotation of the movable projected member is stopped after rotating by a predetermined angle after passing through the above, the length is set to be detected by the sensor.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the rotation of the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is stopped in response to the detection of the passage of the shielding member (for example, the light shielding piece 791) by the sensor. At that time, it takes a predetermined time for the movable projected member to decelerate and actually stop, but in consideration of this predetermined time, the shielding member passes through the sensor for the circumferential length of the shielding member. Even if the movable projected member stops rotating after rotating by a predetermined angle, the length is set to be detected by the sensor. Thereby, for example, if the shielding member is not detected by the sensor when the rotation of the movable projected member is stopped, it can be determined that the positional deviation has occurred. Therefore, even if a trouble such as a misalignment occurs, the subsequent processing can be appropriately performed, so that it is possible to preferably perform an effect having a higher visual visual effect.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 4-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[4-1th gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a projection means capable of projecting image light (for example, a projector 213) and a plurality of projection areas on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. A prismatic movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having a (For example, a drive mechanism 815, a large diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear shape portion 744), and the movable projected member comprises a first projection surface (for example, a first projection surface) constituting the first projection region. The projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 or the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) and the second projection surface (for example, the second projection surface) constituting the second projection area adjacent to the first projection area. It has at least a projection surface 7123) of the screen member 712, and a joint groove (for example, a groove 7142) is formed on the back surface of the first projection surface, and the second projection surface is formed in the joint groove. By joining the back surfaces of the above, the first projection surface and the second projection surface form the corners of the prismatic column.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in the joint groove formed on the back surface of the first projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 or the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). By joining the back surfaces of the second projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712), a prismatic corner portion is formed between the first projection surface and the second projection surface. Therefore, it is possible to fill the gap between the two ends that may occur at the joint between the end on the long side of the first projection surface and the end on the long side of the second projection surface. Therefore, even if the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is located at a position where the corners of the prismatic column can be seen from the front, the continuity of the image projected from the projector (for example, the projector 213). Can be suppressed as much as possible, and the discomfort that can be caused by the gap between the end on the long side of the first projection surface and the end on the long side of the second projection surface can be caused. Since it can be reduced, it is possible to preferably perform an effect with a higher visual effect.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 4-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[Second 4-2 gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a projection means capable of projecting image light (for example, a projector 213) and a plurality of projection areas on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. A prismatic movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having a For example, the movable projected member includes a drive mechanism 815, a large diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear shape portion 744), and the movable projected member has a first projection surface (for example, a first projection surface) constituting the first projection region. The projection surface 7123 of the screen member 712 of 1) and the second projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7141 or the third of the second screen member 714) constituting the second projection area adjacent to the first projection area. The first projection surface and the second projection surface have at least the projection surface 7167) of the screen member 716, and the first projection surface and the second projection surface are the back surface side of the first projection surface forming the corners of the prismatic column. It is characterized in that it is fixed by a rod-shaped member (for example, an arm member 7144) straddling the back surface side of the second projection surface.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the first projection surface and the second projection surface are the back surface side of the first projection surface and the second projection surface forming the corners of the prism. Since it is fixed by a rod-shaped member (for example, arm member 7144) that straddles the back surface side, the first projection surface and the second projection surface can be firmly joined, and the length of the first projection surface can be obtained. It is possible to suppress the generation of a gap between the end portion on the side side and the end portion on the long side side of the second projection surface, which may occur at the joint portion. Therefore, even if the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is located at a position where the corners of the prismatic column can be seen in the front view, the image light projected from the projection means (for example, the projector 213) causes the movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700). It is possible to suppress the continuity of the projected image from being interrupted as much as possible, and between the end on the long side of the first projection surface and the end on the long side of the second projection surface. Since the discomfort that may occur due to the gap can be reduced, it is possible to preferably perform an effect with a higher visual effect.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the rod-shaped member (for example, the arm member 7144) straddling the back surface side of the first projection surface and the back surface side of the second projection surface is movable. A plurality of members to be projected (for example, the movable screen unit 700) are provided along the longitudinal direction, so that the first projection surface and the second projection surface are fixed.

According to the gaming machine of (2), since a plurality of rod-shaped members (for example, arm member 7144) are provided along the longitudinal direction of the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700), the first projection is performed. Even in the middle abdomen where a gap is particularly likely to occur between the surface and the second projection surface, the generation of the gap can be suppressed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) forms the prismatic corners of the first projection surface. A joint groove (for example, groove 7142) is formed on the back surface of the portion, and the back surface of the second projection surface is joined to the joint groove.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the back surface of the second projection surface is joined to the joining groove (for example, groove 7142) formed on the back surface of the first projection surface forming the corners of the prismatic column. Therefore, it is possible to fill the gap between the two at the joint between the end on the long side of the first projection surface and the end on the long side of the second projection surface. Therefore, even if the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is located at a position where the corners of the prismatic column can be seen in the front view, the continuous image projected from the projection means (for example, the projector 213) is continuous. It is possible to suppress the interruption of sex as much as possible, and the discomfort that may occur due to the gap between the end on the long side of the first projection surface and the end on the long side of the second projection surface. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform an effect with a higher visual effect.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a fourth-third gaming machine having the following configuration.

[4th-3rd gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a projection means capable of projecting image light (for example, a projector 213) and a plurality of projection areas on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. A prismatic movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having a For example, the movable projected member includes a drive mechanism 815, a large diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear shape portion 744), and the movable projected member has a first projection surface (for example, a first projection surface) constituting the first projection region. 2 The projection surface 7141 of the screen member 714) and the second projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) constituting the second projection area adjacent to the first projection area. It has at least one of the first projection surface and the second projection, and the other projection surface side is on the back surface side of one of the projection surfaces (for example, the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). At least two ribs (eg, female rib 7164) are formed toward the surface, and at least one rib (eg, male) is formed on the back surface side of the other projection surface toward the back surface side of the one projection surface. Ribs 7145) are formed, and the first projection surface and the second projection surface have one rib formed on the back surface side of the other projection surface on the back surface side of the one projection surface. It is characterized in that it is fixed in a manner of being sandwiched between two formed ribs.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the first projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) and the second projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). One rib (for example, male rib 7145) formed on the back surface side of the other projection surface is sandwiched between two ribs (for example, female rib 7164) formed on the back surface side of one of the projection surfaces. Since it is fixed in the above-mentioned manner, the first projection surface and the second projection surface can be firmly joined, and the generation of a gap between the two can be suppressed. Therefore, even if the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is located at a position where the corners of the prismatic column can be seen in the front view, the image light projected from the projection means (for example, the projector 213) causes the movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700). Since it is possible to suppress the continuity of the projected image from being interrupted as much as possible, and it is possible to reduce the discomfort that may occur due to the gap between the first projection surface and the second projection surface. It is possible to preferably perform an effect with a higher visual effect.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is the first projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714). A joint groove (for example, groove 7143) is formed on the back surface of the portion forming the corner of the prismatic column, and the second projection surface (for example, the projection of the third screen member 716) is formed on the joint groove. It is characterized in that the back surface of the surface 7167) is configured to be joined.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, a joining groove (for example, for example) formed on the back surface of a first projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) forming a prismatic corner portion. Since the back surface of the second projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) is joined to the groove 7143), it may occur at the joint portion between the first projection surface and the second projection surface. The gap between the two can be filled. Therefore, even if the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is located at a position where the corners of the prismatic column can be seen from the front, it is further projected from the projection means (for example, the projector 213). It is possible to prevent the continuity of the image projected by the image light from being interrupted, and it is possible to reduce the discomfort that may occur due to the gap between the first projection surface and the second projection surface.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a fifth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[Fifth gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a projection means capable of projecting image light (for example, a projector 213) and a plurality of projection areas on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. A prismatic movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) to which a base member (for example, a right base 732) is attached to an end portion in the longitudinal direction, and provided on the base member. Movable projected member driving means (for example, drive mechanism 815, large diameter gear 742, stopper mechanism 790, and gear shape portion 744) capable of rotating and stopping the movable projected member in the circumferential direction. The movable projected member is adjacent to a first projection surface (for example, a projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712) constituting the first projection area and the first projection area. A second projection plane (for example, the projection plane 7141 of the second screen member 714) constituting the second projection region and a third projection region constituting the third projection region adjacent to the second projection region. It has at least a projection surface (for example, a projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716), and a plurality of corners forming the prism are formed between the projection surfaces adjacent to each other and the plurality of corners. At least one corner of the portion, on the back surface side of the two projection surfaces forming the one corner, a mounting demarcation member (for example, a mounting demarcation rib 7122) that defines the mounting direction of the base member is provided. It is characterized by being provided.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the base member can be easily attached to the end portion of the movable projected member. In this way, by improving the work efficiency of assembly, it is possible to suitably realize a production with a high visual visual effect.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides the 6-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[6-1th gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a projection means capable of projecting image light (for example, a projector 213) and a projection area on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. It has at least a first projection area (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) and a second projection area (for example, the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716), and the projection area can be changed. A movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) configured and a movable projected member driving means (for example, a drive mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742) capable of operating the movable projected member. A stopper mechanism 790 and a gear shape portion 744) are provided, and the movable projected member driving means has either an image projected on the first projection area or an image projected on the second projection area. It is characterized in that the movable projected member is operably configured so as to be visually recognizable.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the image light projected on the first projection area (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) and the second projection area (for example, the third screen member). It is possible to realize an effect in which both the image light projected on the projection surface 7167) of the 716 can be visually recognized, and the interest can be enhanced. Such an effect with high visual visual effect cannot be realized by, for example, a liquid crystal display, but can be realized only by utilizing the functions peculiar to the projector.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the first projection area on which the image light is projected and the projection in the second projection area on which the image light is projected. It is characterized in that the three-dimensional shape of the surface is composed of different shapes from each other.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the first projection region and the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the second projection region are configured to be different from each other, the visual visual effect can be obtained. It is possible to perform higher production.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a sixth-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[6-2 gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a projection means capable of projecting image light (for example, a projector 213) and a projection area on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. It has at least a first projection area (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) and a second projection area (for example, the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716), and the projection area can be changed. A movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) configured and a movable projected member driving means (for example, a drive mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742) capable of operating the movable projected member. A fixed projected member (eg, fixed base 708) having a stopper mechanism 790 and a gear shape portion 744) and a fixed projection area (eg, lower screen 7082) on which the image projected from the projection means is projected. The movable projected member driving means can change the projection area between the first projection area and the second projection area in a state where the image is projected on the fixed display area. It is characterized by being composed of.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in a state where the image is projected on the fixed display area, the first projection area (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) and the second projection area (for example). For example, since the projection area can be changed between the projection surface 7167) of the third screen member 716, it is possible to realize a production with a higher visual visual effect and enhance the interest. In particular, when the projection area of the movable projected member and the fixed projection area of the fixed projected member (for example, the fixed base 708) (for example, the lower screen 7082) form one projection area. , The visual effect of the image is further enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) in the first projection region on which the image is projected, and the image. The three-dimensional shape of the projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) in the second projection region on which the image is projected is characterized in that the three-dimensional shapes are different from each other.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) in the first projection region and the projection surface in the second projection region (for example, the third). Since the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface 7167) of the screen member 716 is configured to be different from each other, it is possible to produce an effect with a higher visual visual effect.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a sixth-third gaming machine having the following configuration.

[No. 6-3 gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a projection means capable of projecting image light (for example, a projector 213) and a projection area on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. It has at least a first projection area (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) and a second projection area (for example, the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716), and the projection area can be changed. A movable projected member material (for example, a movable screen unit 700) to be configured and a movable projected member driving means (for example, a drive mechanism 815, a large diameter gear 742) capable of operating the movable projected portion. , The stopper mechanism 790 and the gear shape portion 744), and the movable projected member driving means has an image projected on the first display area and an image projected on the second display area. The movable projected member can be operated in such a manner that both can be visually recognized, and the movable projected member shadows at least one of the first projection area and the second projection area. It is characterized in that it is configured so that a region is formed.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since a shadow region is formed in at least one of the first projection region and the second projection region, it is possible to realize a production with a higher visual visual effect. , Can enhance the interest. That is, although the image light originally projected from the projection means can be projected, the image light is not projected and the shadow region is formed. As a result, for example, a hidden image that cannot be visually recognized in a shaded area is projected, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a movable projected member is operated so that the hidden image is projected. It will be possible to realize it.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, at least one of the projection planes constituting the first projection region and the projection plane constituting the second projection region is the projection. It is characterized by having a bulging protrusion on the side of the means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, it is possible to produce a higher visual visual effect with a simple configuration having only a convex portion bulging on the side of the projection means.

The phrase "bulging toward the projection means" means that when the image light is directly projected onto the projection surface by a projection means such as a projector, it bulges toward the projection means such as the projector. When the image light projected by the projection means such as a projector is reflected by a reflecting member such as a mirror and then projected onto the projection surface, it means that the image light swells toward the reflecting member such as the mirror.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides the 7-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[7-1th gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, an internal lottery means) for drawing lots based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, and a plurality of gaming states (for example, general gaming states) having different advantages for the player. , The game state control means (for example, the main control board 71) that controls any of the notification game states), and the projection means (for example, the projector 213) that can project the image light according to the result of the lottery. A movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having a plurality of projection areas as a projection area on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means, and the movable projected member are operated. The movable projected member is provided with a movable projected member driving means (for example, a drive mechanism 815, a large diameter gear 742, and a gear shape portion 744), and the movable projected member is an image projected from the projection means. As a projection area on which an image is projected by light, it has at least a first projection area and a second projection area, and the projection area can be changed by being operated by the movable projected member driving means. At the same time, the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the first projection region on which the image is projected by the image light and the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the second projection area on which the image is projected by the image light are obtained. The movable projected member driving means is configured to have different shapes from each other, and the movable projected member driving means is such that the image light projected from the projection means is projected onto different projection regions according to the gaming state. It is characterized in that the member is configured to be operable.

According to the game machine of the above (1), the projection area on which the image is projected is not only changed according to the game state by the image light projected from the projection means, but also it is as simple as operating the movable projected member. With this configuration, it is possible to project an image on a projection surface having different visual effects depending on the game state. Moreover, since the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the first projection area and the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the second projection area are configured to be different from each other, it is possible to produce a higher visual visual effect. Become.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a seventh-two gaming machine having the following configuration.

[7-2 game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, an internal lottery means) for drawing lots based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, and a plurality of gaming states (for example, general gaming states) having different advantages for the player. , The game state control means (for example, the main control board 71) that controls any of the notification game states), and the projection means (for example, the projector 213) that can project the image light according to the result of the lottery. A movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having a plurality of projection areas as a projection area on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means, and the movable projected member are operated. The movable projected member is provided with a movable projected member driving means (for example, a drive mechanism 815, a large diameter gear 742, and a gear shape portion 744), and the movable projected member is an image projected from the projection means. As a projection area on which an image is projected by light, it has at least a first projection area and a second projection area, and the projection area can be changed by being operated by the movable projected member driving means. At the same time, the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the first projection region on which the image is projected by the image light and the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the second projection area on which the image is projected by the image light are obtained. The movable projected member driving means is configured to have different shapes from each other, and the movable projected member driving means is such that the image light projected from the projection means is projected onto different projection regions according to the gaming state. The member is operable, and one projection area (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712) of the plurality of projection areas and another projection area adjacent to the one projection area (for example, the first projection area). It is characterized in that the movable projected member is operably configured so that forward rotation and reverse rotation are repeatedly performed between the projection surface 7141) of the screen member 714 of 2.

According to the game machine of the above (1), the projection area on which the image is projected is not only changed according to the game state by the image light projected from the projection means, but also it is as simple as operating the movable projected member. With this configuration, it is possible to project an image on a projection surface having different visual effects depending on the game state. Moreover, since the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the first projection area and the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the second projection area are configured to be different from each other, it is possible to produce a higher visual visual effect. Become. Further, while the image is projected on different projection areas according to the game state by the image light projected from the projection means, the forward rotation and the reverse rotation are repeated between one projection area and the other projection area. Since it is possible to perform the effect, it is possible to perform an effect of expecting which projection area the image light is projected on. For example, if the video light is projected onto one projection area in a relatively advantageous gaming state and the video light is projected onto another projection area in a relatively unfavorable gaming state, one projection area and another projection. By repeatedly performing forward rotation and reverse rotation between the area and the area, it is possible to suitably perform an effect with a high visual visual effect.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides an eighth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[8th gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine provided with a lottery means (for example, an internal lottery means) for performing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the game proceeds according to the result of the lottery. A projection means capable of projecting a predetermined image light (for example, a projector 213) and an image light control means capable of controlling an image projected by the image light projected from the projection means (for example, a sub-control board 72). ), The first projection area (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712) and the second projection area (for example, for example) as the projection area in which the image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. It has a movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having at least a projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and a fixed projection area on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. A fixed projected member (eg, lower screen 7082 of the fixed base 708), a movable projected member driving means capable of actuating the movable projected member (eg, drive mechanism 815, large diameter gear 742 and). The image light control means can project a first image light according to the result of the lottery and a second image light not related to the result of the lottery. Yes, the image projected by the first image light (for example, an effect image) is projected on at least the projection area of the movable projected member, and the image projected by the second image light (for example, for example). The information image) is characterized in that it is configured to be projected onto at least a projection region of the fixed projection member.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the image projected by the first image light according to the result of the lottery is projected at least in the projection area of the movable projected member, and has nothing to do with the result of the lottery. Since the image projected by the two image lights is projected at least in the projection area of the fixed projected member, the image projected by the second image light is projected onto the projection area of the fixed projected member while being projected. The image projected by the first image light can be projected onto the projection area of the movable projected member, and it is possible to suitably perform an effect having a high image visual effect.

According to the first to eighth gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to suitably perform an effect having a higher visual visual effect.

[9th to 12th gaming machines]
Conventionally, a game called a pachislot machine equipped with a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols on each surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known.

The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "start operation") after the game medium such as medals and coins has been inserted into the game machine, and all reels are rotated. Outputs a signal requesting a start.

The stop switch detects that the stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation"), and outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of the corresponding reel. do.

The stepping motor transfers its driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as "internal lottery process") is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as "internal winning combination") is performed. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and the combination of symbols (display combination) related to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the combination of the symbols.

By the way, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a liquid crystal display device in which an effect is performed according to the result of a lottery, and a light guide plate provided on the front side of a display area of the display device. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-8744).

The liquid crystal display device of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-8744 faces the front direction so that the display area where the effect is performed can be seen by the player, and the light guide plate is provided on the front side of this display area. However, in recent years, there has been a demand for higher visual and visual effects.

In addition, although it is possible to produce an effect that enhances the interest by providing a light guide plate, since a corresponding area is required for the installation space, there is a risk that problems such as squeezing the installation space of other devices may occur. was there.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to enhance the interest by preferably performing a production having a higher visual visual effect.

In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides the ninth-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[9th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of LED921) that emits a predetermined light and a light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 911) in which an image appears by taking in the predetermined light. The light guide plate is provided with an incoming light portion (for example, side surfaces 911A1, 911B1,911C1 on the base end side) into which the predetermined light enters, and the light received from the light entering portion causes the image to be formed. It has a display surface portion (for example, flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3) that appears, and the display surface portion is inclined with respect to a predetermined traveling direction of light emitted from the light emitting surface portion, and the light guide plate. It is characterized in that the light entering portion is formed so as to face the light emitting surface portion while being substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken in the light emitting portion.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the display surface portion of the light guide plate (for example, flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3) is emitted from the light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of LED921) with respect to a predetermined traveling direction of light. Since it is tilted and is substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken into the light guide plate, the image can be seen from a viewpoint different from the conventional one while saving the installation space. The visual effect of the image can be further enhanced.

By the way, when the display surface portion (for example, the flat surface 911A3, 911B3, 911C3) of the light guide plate is tilted to the left or / or to the right with respect to the light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of the LED 921), the light emitting surface portion and the guide are arranged. A predetermined angle is generated between the light entering portion of the light emitting plate (for example, the side surfaces 911A1, 911B3, 911C3 on the base end side), and there is a possibility that the light from the light emitting surface portion cannot sufficiently enter the light guide plate. Therefore, by forming the light receiving portion of the light guide plate so as to face the light emitting surface portion, sufficient light can be received, and the visual visual effect is preferably enhanced.

It should be noted that "the image appears by taking in the predetermined light" is not limited to the fact that the image does not appear in the normal time (when the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is not taken in). .. For example, an image can be visually recognized even in a normal state by, for example, ambient light, and a clearer image appears when a predetermined light emitted from a light emitting surface portion is taken in. In addition, although the image is normally invisible by composing the image with a transparent paint or a transparent member, it can be visually recognized by taking in a predetermined light.

Further, the "image" generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, it is indirectly or directly displayed by light emitted from a light emitting surface portion. Things are also called "images".

Further, the "light emitting surface portion" includes, for example, a single LED. Further, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED921) is arranged is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. However, the irradiation direction from the light source arranged on the substrate may be a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb), or the light source itself may be arranged at an angle with respect to the substrate. Therefore, the aspect in which the display surface portion is inclined with respect to the irradiation direction from the light source is also included.

In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides the ninth-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[9-2 game machine]

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a light emitting surface portion (for example, a light emitting surface of LED921) that emits a predetermined light and a light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate) that has a display surface portion that displays an image by taking in the predetermined light. The light guide plate 911) is provided in a wall shape so as to be inclined with respect to the traveling direction of a predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion, and a reflective surface portion (for example, inside) capable of reflecting an image appearing on the light guide plate. The light guide plate is provided with a face wall 914L, 914R), and the display surface portion of the light guide plate is inclined with respect to a predetermined traveling direction of light emitted from the light emitting surface portion inside the reflection surface portion in front view. At the same time, by being substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken into the light guide plate, both the image appearing on the display surface portion and the reflected image obtained by reflecting the image on the reflecting surface portion can be obtained. It is characterized by being configured so that it can be visually recognized.

According to the gaming machine of (1), the display surface portion of the light guide plate is inclined with respect to a predetermined traveling direction of light emitted from the light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of LED921), and the display surface portion is inclined. Since it is substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken into the light guide plate, the image can be seen from a viewpoint different from the conventional one while saving the installation space, and the visual visual effect can be further enhanced. Can be done.

Moreover, since both the image appearing on the display surface portion and the reflected image reflected on the reflecting surface portion (for example, the inner wall 914L, 914R) can be visually recognized, the effect of higher visual visual effect is obtained. Can be done.

It should be noted that "the image appears by taking in the predetermined light" is not limited to the fact that the image does not appear in the normal time (when the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is not taken in). .. For example, an image can be visually recognized even in a normal state by, for example, ambient light, and a clearer image appears when a predetermined light emitted from a light emitting surface portion is taken in. In addition, although the image is normally invisible by composing the image with a transparent paint or a transparent member, it can be visually recognized by taking in a predetermined light.

Further, the "image" generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, it is indirectly or directly displayed by light emitted from a light emitting surface portion. Things are also called "images".

Further, the "light emitting surface portion" includes, for example, a single LED. Further, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED921) is arranged is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. However, the irradiation direction from the light source arranged on the substrate may be a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb), or the light source itself may be arranged at an angle with respect to the substrate. Therefore, the aspect in which the display surface portion is inclined with respect to the irradiation direction from the light source is also included.

In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides the ninth-3 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[9th-3 gaming machines]

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of LED921) that emits a predetermined light and a light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 911) in which an image appears by taking in the predetermined light. The light guide plate is provided with an incoming light portion (for example, side surfaces 911A1, 911B1,911C1 on the base end side) into which the predetermined light enters, and the light received from the light entering portion causes the image to be formed. It has a display surface portion (for example, a flat surface 911A3, 911B3, 911C3) and an injection portion (for example, a side surface 911A2, 911B2, 911C2 on the anti-base end side) that emits light input from the light entrance portion. The display surface portion is inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion, and is substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken into the light guide plate. The injection portion is characterized in that the injection portion is cut so that the angle formed with the front surface of the display surface portion is a sharp angle.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the display surface portion of the light guide plate (for example, flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3) is emitted from the light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of LED921) with respect to a predetermined traveling direction of light. Since it is tilted and is substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken into the light guide plate, the image can be seen from a viewpoint different from the conventional one while saving the installation space. The visual effect of the image can be further enhanced.

Moreover, since the injection portion of the light guide plate (for example, the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, 911C2 on the anti-base end side) is cut so that the angle formed by the front surface of the display surface portion of the light guide plate is an acute angle. , The light emitted from the ejection unit can be made difficult to see from the player side, and the light emitted from the ejection unit is used to appeal to a third party about the state of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to do. In this way, it is possible to preferably further enhance the visual visual effect.

It should be noted that "the image appears by taking in the predetermined light" is not limited to the fact that the image does not appear in the normal time (when the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is not taken in). .. For example, an image can be visually recognized even in a normal state by, for example, ambient light, and a clearer image appears when a predetermined light emitted from a light emitting surface portion is taken in. In addition, although the image is normally invisible by composing the image with a transparent paint or a transparent member, it can be visually recognized by taking in a predetermined light.

Further, the "image" generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, it is indirectly or directly displayed by light emitted from a light emitting surface portion. Things are also called "images".

Further, the "light emitting surface portion" includes, for example, a single LED. Further, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED921) is arranged is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. However, the irradiation direction from the light source arranged on the substrate may be a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb), or the light source itself may be arranged at an angle with respect to the substrate. Therefore, the aspect in which the display surface portion is inclined with respect to the irradiation direction from the light source is also included.

In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides the 10-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[No. 10-1 gaming machine]

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of LED921) that emits a predetermined light and a first light guide plate (for example, a first light guide plate) in which an image appears by taking in the predetermined light. 1 light guide plate 911A) and a second light guide plate (for example, a second light guide plate 911B), and the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate receive the predetermined light. A light entering portion (for example, a side surface 911A1 on the base end side and a side surface 911B1 on the base end side) and a display surface portion (for example, a flat surface 911A3 and a flat surface 911B3) on which the image appears due to the light entering from the light entering portion. Each has an ejection portion (for example, a side surface 911A2 on the anti-base end side and a side surface 911B2 on the anti-base end side) that emits light input from the light entrance portion, and the display surface portions face each other. These display surface portions are inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion, and are overlapped so as to be substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken into the light guide plate. Further, between the display surface portion of the first light guide plate and the display surface portion of the second light guide plate, an inclined surface having a downward inclination from the light entering portion toward the injection portion is provided. It is characterized in that the ribs having the ribs (for example, ribs 9113A, 9115A, 9117A, 9119A) are formed.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the first light guide plate (for example, the first light guide plate 911A) and the second light guide plate (for example, the second light guide plate 911B) have a display surface portion (for example) of each other. For example, while the flat surfaces 911A3) face each other, these display surface portions are inclined with respect to the traveling direction of predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of the LED 921), and are incorporated into the light guide plate. They are arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the image appearing on each light guide plate with parallax (deviation) while saving the installation space, and it is possible to produce a highly visual visual effect.

Moreover, between the display surface portion of the first light guide plate and the display surface portion of the second light guide plate, ribs (for example, ribs 9113A, 9115A) having an inclined surface that is inclined downward from the light entering portion toward the injection portion. , 9117A, 9119A) are formed. Therefore, the distance between the display surface portion of the first light guide plate and the display surface portion of the second light guide plate is the largest on the light input portion side and gradually decreases toward the emission portion side. As a result, on the light receiving portion side, it is possible to suppress the incoming light from the light sources that should enter the other light guide plates, and on the emitting portion side, the emitting portion and the second light guide plate of the first light guide plate are suppressed. Since the distance from the light source of the light guide plate is short, it is possible to emit thick light, and it is possible to enhance the appeal to a third party.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1) above is further provided with a third light guide plate (for example, a third light guide plate 911C) on which an image appears by taking in the predetermined light, and the third guide. The light plate includes a light input portion (for example, a side surface 911C1 on the base end side) into which the predetermined light enters, and a display surface portion (for example, a flat surface 911C3) in which the image appears due to the light received from the light input portion. The display surface portion is a display surface portion (for example, a flat surface) of the second light guide plate, and has an emission portion (for example, a side surface 911C2 on the anti-base end side) for emitting light input from the light entrance portion. While facing 911B3), it is inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion, and is substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light incorporated in the light guide plate. They are arranged so as to be overlapped with each other, and further, between the display surface portion of the second light guide plate and the display surface portion of the third light guide plate, there is an inclination that is downwardly inclined from the light entrance portion toward the injection portion. It is characterized in that ribs having a surface (for example, ribs 9113B, 9115B, 9117B, 9119B) are formed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, also for the third light guide plate, the display surface portion (for example, flat surface 911C3) of the third light guide plate is the display surface portion (for example, flat surface 911B3) of the second light guide plate. ) While being inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion, and overlapping so as to be substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken into the light guide plate. Have been placed. Therefore, on the light receiving portion side, it is possible to suppress the incoming light from the light source that should enter the other light guide plate, and on the emitting portion side, the distance from the emitting portion of the other light guide plate becomes short. Therefore, it is possible to emit thicker light in combination with the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate, and it is possible to further enhance the appeal to a third party. In addition, while saving the installation space, it is possible to visually recognize more images appearing on each light guide plate with parallax (deviation), and it is possible to produce a highly visual effect.

In addition, the "image appears by taking in a predetermined light" described in the above (1) and (2) means that the image appears in a normal time (when the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is not taken in). It is not limited to the fact that it does not appear. For example, an image can be visually recognized even in a normal state by, for example, ambient light, and a clearer image appears when a predetermined light emitted from a light emitting surface portion is taken in. In addition, although the image is normally invisible by composing the image with a transparent paint or a transparent member, it can be visually recognized by taking in a predetermined light.

Further, the "image" generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, it is indirectly or directly displayed by light emitted from a light emitting surface portion. Things are also called "images".

Further, the "light emitting surface portion" includes, for example, a single LED. Further, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED921) is arranged is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. However, the irradiation direction from the light source arranged on the substrate may be a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb), or the light source itself may be arranged at an angle with respect to the substrate. Therefore, the aspect in which the display surface portion is inclined with respect to the irradiation direction from the light source is also included.

In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides the tenth and second gaming machines having the following configurations.

[10-2 gaming machine]

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of LED921) that emits a predetermined light and a first light guide plate (for example, a first light guide plate) in which an image appears by taking in the predetermined light. 1 light guide plate 911A) and a second light guide plate (for example, a second light guide plate 911B), and the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate receive the predetermined light. A light entering portion (for example, a side surface 911A1 on the base end side and a side surface 911B1 on the base end side) and a display surface portion (for example, a flat surface 911A3 and a flat surface 911B3) on which the image appears due to the light entering from the light entering portion. Each has an ejection portion (for example, a side surface 911A2 on the anti-base end side and a side surface 911B2 on the anti-base end side) that emits light input from the light entrance portion, and the display surface portions face each other. These display surface portions are inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion, and are arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the incorporated predetermined light. Further, a first light guide plate having a predetermined length between the display surface portion of the first light guide plate and the display surface portion of the second light guide plate is provided relatively on the light entrance side. It is characterized in that a protrusion and a second protrusion shorter than the first protrusion and provided on the injection side are provided.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate face each other with their display surface portions facing each other, and these display surface portions emit a predetermined light traveling direction from the light emitting surface portion. It is inclined with respect to the light, and is arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken in. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the image appearing on each light guide plate with parallax (deviation) while saving the installation space, and it is possible to produce a highly visual visual effect. Here, "substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the incorporated predetermined light" means that the display surface portion of the first light guide plate is relative to the traveling direction of the predetermined light incorporated in the first light guide plate. It means that the display surface portion of the second light guide plate is substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light incorporated in the second light guide plate.

Moreover, between the display surface portion of the first light guide plate and the display surface portion of the second light guide plate, a first protrusion having a predetermined length and a second protrusion shorter than the first protrusion are the first protrusions. It is provided on the injection side. Therefore, the distance between the display surface portion of the first light guide plate and the display surface portion of the second light guide plate is larger on the light entrance side than on the emission side. As a result, on the light entering portion side, it is possible to suppress the incoming light from the light sources that should enter the other light guide plates. On the other hand, on the injection unit side, the distance between the injection unit of the first light guide plate and the injection unit of the second light guide plate is closer than that on the light inlet side, so that thick light can be emitted to a third party. It is possible to enhance the appeal to the person.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1) above further includes a third light guide plate on which an image appears by taking in the predetermined light, and the third light guide plate receives the predetermined light. The display surface portion has a light input portion, a display surface portion in which the image appears by the light input from the light input portion, and an emission portion for emitting the light input from the light input portion, and the display surface portion is the first. While facing the display surface portion of No. 2, it is inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion, and is substantially relative to the traveling direction of the predetermined light incorporated in the third light guide plate. They are arranged so as to be parallel to each other, and further have a predetermined length between the display surface portion of the second light guide plate and the display surface portion of the third light guide plate, and are relatively forward. It is characterized in that a third protrusion provided on the entry light side and a fourth protrusion shorter than the third protrusion and provided on the injection side are provided.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, also for the third light guide plate, the direction of travel of predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion while the display surface portion of the third light guide plate faces the second display surface portion. In addition to being inclined with respect to the light, the light is arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken into the third light guide plate. Therefore, on the light receiving portion side, it is possible to suppress the incoming light from the light source that should enter the other light guide plate, and on the emitting portion side, the distance from the emitting portion of the other light guide plate becomes short. Therefore, it is possible to emit thicker light in combination with the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate, and it is possible to further enhance the appeal to a third party. In addition, while saving the installation space, it is possible to visually recognize more images appearing on each light guide plate with parallax (deviation), and it is possible to produce a highly visual effect.

In addition, the "image appears by taking in a predetermined light" described in the above (1) and (2) means that the image appears in a normal time (when the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is not taken in). It is not limited to the fact that it does not appear. For example, an image can be visually recognized even in a normal state by, for example, ambient light, and a clearer image appears when a predetermined light emitted from a light emitting surface portion is taken in. In addition, although the image is normally invisible by composing the image with a transparent paint or a transparent member, it can be visually recognized by taking in a predetermined light.

Further, the "image" generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, it is indirectly or directly displayed by light emitted from a light emitting surface portion. Things are also called "images".

Further, the "light emitting surface portion" includes, for example, a single LED. Further, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED921) is arranged is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. However, the irradiation direction from the light source arranged on the substrate may be a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb), or the light source itself may be arranged at an angle with respect to the substrate. Therefore, the aspect in which the display surface portion is inclined with respect to the irradiation direction from the light source is also included.

In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides the tenth to third gaming machines having the following configurations.

[No. 10-3 gaming machine]

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of LED921) that emits a predetermined light and a first light guide plate (for example, a first light guide plate) in which an image appears by taking in the predetermined light. 1 light guide plate 911A) and a second light guide plate (for example, a second light guide plate 911B), and the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate receive the predetermined light. A light entering portion (for example, a side surface 911A1 on the base end side and a side surface 911B1 on the base end side) and a display surface portion (for example, a flat surface 911A3 and a flat surface 911B3) on which the image appears due to the light entering from the light entering portion. Each has an ejection portion (for example, a side surface 911A2 on the anti-base end side and a side surface 911B2 on the anti-base end side) that emits light input from the light entrance portion, and the display surface portions face each other. These display surface portions are inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion, and are overlapped so as to be substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken into the light guide plate. It is characterized by being arranged.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate face each other with their display surface portions facing each other, and these display surface portions emit a predetermined light traveling direction from the light emitting surface portion. It is inclined with respect to the light guide plate and is arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken into the light guide plate. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the image appearing on each light guide plate with parallax (deviation) while saving the installation space, and it is possible to produce a highly visual visual effect.

In addition, the "image appears by taking in a predetermined light" described in the above (1) and (2) means that the image appears in a normal time (when the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is not taken in). It is not limited to the fact that it does not appear. For example, an image can be visually recognized even in a normal state by, for example, ambient light, and a clearer image appears when a predetermined light emitted from a light emitting surface portion is taken in. In addition, although the image is normally invisible by composing the image with a transparent paint or a transparent member, it can be visually recognized by taking in a predetermined light.

Further, the "image" generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, it is indirectly or directly displayed by light emitted from a light emitting surface portion. Things are also called "images".

Further, the "light emitting surface portion" includes, for example, a single LED. Further, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED921) is arranged is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. However, the irradiation direction from the light source arranged on the substrate may be a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb), or the light source itself may be arranged at an angle with respect to the substrate. Therefore, the aspect in which the display surface portion is inclined with respect to the irradiation direction from the light source is also included.

In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides the 11-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[11-1 gaming machine]

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is from a light emitting surface portion (for example, LED substrate 922) in which at least a first light source and a second light source are arranged, and the first light source and / or the second light source. A gaming machine having a light input portion (for example, a side surface 911C1 of a base end portion) that takes in at least the light of the light source, and a light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 911C) that displays an image by taking in light from the light input portion. The light input portion is a first projection portion (for example, a projecting body 956) that receives light from the first light source, and a second light input portion that receives light from the second light source. It has at least two protrusions (eg, another protrusion 956 adjacent to the protrusion 956), and the gaming machine has at least the first protrusion and the second protrusion. It is characterized by including a partition member (for example, a partition wall 937).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, between the first protrusion (for example, a protrusion 956) and the second protrusion (for example, another protrusion 956 adjacent to the protrusion 956). Since it is possible to prevent the incident of light from each other's light sources, that is, the incident of other light sources in a mixed manner, it is possible to produce a highly visual visual effect.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, in the light guide plate, the display surface portion (for example, the flat surface 911C3) on which the image appears due to the light received from the light input portion is the first light source or /. And is inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the light from the second light source, and is substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken into the light guide plate, and the first protrusion and the first. The protrusions 2 are characterized in that they are formed so as to face the first light source and the second light source, respectively.

When the display surface portion (for example, the flat surface 911C3) of the light guide plate is tilted with respect to the traveling direction of the light from the light source as in the game machine of (2) above, the traveling direction and the guide of the light from the light source are arranged. A predetermined angle is generated between the light source and the edge of the light plate, and there is a possibility that the light from the light source cannot sufficiently enter the light guide plate. Therefore, the first protrusion is formed so as to face the first light source, and the second protrusion is formed so as to face the second light source. As a result, the light emitted from the first light source is efficiently incident on the first protrusion, and the light emitted from the second light source is efficiently incident on the second protrusion. This makes it possible to preferably further enhance the visual visual effect.

It should be noted that the terms "an image appears by taking in light from the light entering part" described in (1) above and "an image appears by light entering light from the light entering part" described in (2) above. It is not limited to the fact that the image does not appear in the normal time (when the light is not taken in from the light input part). For example, even in a normal state, an image can be visually recognized by, for example, taking in ambient light, and a clearer image appears when light is taken in from an incoming light portion. In addition, although the image is normally invisible by composing the image with a transparent paint or a transparent member, it can be visually recognized by taking in a predetermined light.

Further, the "image" generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, an image displayed indirectly or directly by light from a light source is also "image". Called "image".

Further, the "light emitting surface portion" includes, for example, a single LED. Further, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED921) is arranged is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. Further, the traveling direction of the light from the light source arranged on the substrate is not limited to the case where the light source is substantially orthogonal to the substrate, and the light source is a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb) or the light source. The traveling direction of the light from the light source may be inclined with respect to the substrate, as in the case where the light source itself is inclined with respect to the substrate.

In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides the 11-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[11-2 game machine]

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of LED921) that emits a predetermined light and a light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 911) in which an image appears by taking in the predetermined light. The light guide plate is provided with a light input section (for example, side surfaces 911A1, 911B1,911C1 on the base end side) through which the predetermined light enters, and the light received from the light entry section is transmitted. The display surface portion has a display surface portion (for example, flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3) on which the image appears, and the display surface portion is, at least in part, non-transmissive, which inhibits the transmission of light entering from the light entrance portion. It is characterized by having a sexual region.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a predetermined light enters from the light entering portion of the light guide plate, the non-transmissive region is created in a three-dimensional and conspicuous manner by the light transmitting region around it. Therefore, it is possible to produce a highly visual effect.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the light guide plate has a display surface portion that is inclined with respect to a predetermined traveling direction of light emitted from the light emitting surface portion and is incorporated into the light guide plate. It is characterized in that the light entering portion is formed so as to face the light emitting surface portion while being substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the display surface portion of the light guide plate is arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion, the light emitting surface portion and the light input portion of the light guide plate are arranged. A predetermined angle is generated between the two, and there is a possibility that the light emitted from the light emitting surface portion cannot sufficiently enter the light guide plate. Therefore, by forming the light entering portion of the light guide plate so as to face the light emitting surface portion, the light from the light emitting surface portion can efficiently enter the light emitting surface portion. This makes it possible to preferably further enhance the visual visual effect.

The phrase "an image appears by taking in a predetermined light" described in (1) above means that the image does not appear in a normal time (when the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is not taken in). It is not limited to that. For example, an image can be visually recognized even in a normal state by, for example, ambient light, and a clearer image appears when a predetermined light emitted from a light emitting surface portion is taken in. In addition, although the image is normally invisible by composing the image with a transparent paint or a transparent member, it can be visually recognized by taking in a predetermined light.

Further, the "image" generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, it is indirectly or directly displayed by light emitted from a light emitting surface portion. Things are also called "images".

Further, the "light emitting surface portion" described in (1) and (2) above includes, for example, a single LED. Further, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED921) is arranged is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. However, the irradiation direction from the light source arranged on the substrate may be a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb), or the light source itself may be arranged at an angle with respect to the substrate. Therefore, the aspect in which the display surface portion is inclined with respect to the irradiation direction from the light source is also included.

In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides the 12-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[12-1 gaming machine]

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a light emitting surface portion (for example, LED substrate 922) in which a plurality of light sources are arranged, and a plurality of light emitting portions (for example, a lens 928A) that emit light by taking in light from the light source. 928B, 928C) includes a light emitting member (for example, the right lens subsystem 912R) and a light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 911) that displays an image by taking in light from a light source different from the light source. The plurality of light emitting portions are arranged side by side behind the light guide plate so as to have different lengths from the light source, and the light emitting member transmits the light taken in from the light source to the light emitting portion. As a result, each of the plurality of light emitting portions is provided with a conductive portion (for example, light guide lenses 924A, 924B, 924C) having a length corresponding to the length from the light source to the corresponding light emitting portion. It is a feature.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the plurality of light emitting parts are arranged side by side behind the light guide plate so that the lengths from the light source to the light emitting part are different from each other, they are in combination with the image appearing on the light guide plate. Therefore, it is possible to produce a highly visual effect.

By the way, since each of the plurality of light emitting units takes in light from a light source arranged on the same light emitting surface portion, if the lengths from the light source to the light emitting portion are different, the emission intensity of the light in the light emitting portion varies. It may occur. Therefore, the light emitting member has a conductive portion having a length corresponding to the length from the light source to the light emitting portion so as to conduct the light taken in from the light source to the light emitting portion, corresponding to each of the plurality of light emitting portions. ing. As a result, for a plurality of light emitting parts having different lengths from the light source to the light emitting part, the light emitting intensity in the light emitting part is substantially made uniform even though the light is taken in from the light sources arranged on the same light emitting surface part. It becomes possible to perform a production with a higher visual effect.

It should be noted that "the image appears by taking in the light from the light source" is not limited to the fact that the image does not appear in the normal time (when the light is not taken in from the light source). For example, even in a normal state, an image can be visually recognized by, for example, ambient light, and when light is taken in from a light source, a clearer image appears. In addition, although the image is normally invisible by composing the image with a transparent paint or a transparent member, it can be visually recognized by taking in a predetermined light.

Further, the "image" generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, an image displayed indirectly or directly by light from a light source is also "image". Called "image".

Further, the "light emitting surface portion" includes, for example, a single LED. Further, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED921) is arranged is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. Further, the traveling direction of the light from the light source arranged on the substrate is not limited to the case where the light source is substantially orthogonal to the substrate, and the light source is a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb) or the light source. The traveling direction of the light from the light source may be inclined with respect to the substrate, as in the case where the light source itself is inclined with respect to the substrate.

Further, in (1) above, the expressions for distance and dimensions are unified by "length", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the dimensions of the structure itself (for example, the light emitting part itself) are defined as "length". The length between objects may be defined as "distance".

In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides the 12-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[12-2 gaming machine]

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a light emitting surface portion (for example, a light emitting surface of LED921) in which a plurality of light sources are arranged, and a plurality of light emitting portions (for example, a lens 928A) that emit light by taking in light from the light source. , 928B, 928C), and a light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 911) that displays an image by taking in light from a light source different from the light source. The plurality of light emitting units are arranged side by side behind the light guide plate so as to have different lengths from the light source, and the light emitting member conducts the light taken in from the light source to the light emitting unit. As such, it has a conductive portion (for example, light guide lenses 924A, 924B, 924C) having a length corresponding to the length from the light source to the corresponding light emitting portion so as to correspond to each of the plurality of light emitting portions. The conductive portion is characterized in that it is inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the light from the light source and is formed so as to face the light source.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the plurality of light emitting parts are arranged side by side behind the light guide plate so that the lengths from the light source to the light emitting part are different from each other, they are in combination with the image appearing on the light guide plate. Therefore, it is possible to produce a highly visual effect.

By the way, since each of the plurality of light emitting units takes in light from a light source arranged on the same light emitting surface portion, if the lengths from the light source to the light emitting portion are different, the emission intensity of the light in the light emitting portion varies. It may occur. Therefore, the light emitting member has a conductive portion having a length corresponding to the length from the light source to the light emitting portion so as to conduct the light taken in from the light source to the light emitting portion, corresponding to each of the plurality of light emitting portions. ing. Further, since the conductive portion is arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the light from the light source, a predetermined angle is generated between the traveling direction of the light from the light source and the conductive portion, and the light from the light source is emitted. There is a possibility that sufficient light cannot enter the conductive part. Therefore, by forming the conductive portion so as to face the light source arranged on the light emitting surface portion, the light from the light source can efficiently enter the conductive portion. As a result, for a plurality of light emitting parts having different lengths from the light source to the light emitting part, although the light is taken in from the light source arranged on the same light emitting surface part, the light emitting part efficiently takes in the light. It is possible to make the light emission intensity substantially uniform, and it is possible to produce an effect with a higher visual effect.

In addition, "an image appears by taking in light from a light source different from the light emitting member" means that the image does not appear in normal times (when light is not taken in from a light source different from the light emitting member). Not limited. For example, even in a normal state, an image can be visually recognized by, for example, taking in ambient light, and a clearer image appears when light is taken in from a light source other than the light emitting member. In addition, although the image is normally invisible by composing the image with a transparent paint or a transparent member, it can be visually recognized by taking in a predetermined light.

Further, the "image" generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, an image displayed indirectly or directly by light from a light source is also "image". Called "image".

Further, the "light emitting surface portion" includes, for example, a single LED. Further, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED921) is arranged is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. Further, the traveling direction of the light from the light source arranged on the substrate is not limited to the case where the light source is substantially orthogonal to the substrate, and the light source is a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb) or the light source. The traveling direction of the light from the light source may be inclined with respect to the substrate, as in the case where the light source itself is inclined with respect to the substrate.

According to the ninth to twelfth gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to suitably perform an effect having a higher visual visual effect.

<Supplementary note (summary of the invention relating to control in the second embodiment)>
[13th gaming machine]
Conventionally, a game called a pachislot machine equipped with a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols on each surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "start operation") after the game medium such as medals and coins has been inserted into the game machine, and all reels are rotated. Outputs a signal requesting a start. The stop switch detects that the stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation"), and outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of the corresponding reel. do. The stepping motor transfers its driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

In this type of gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as "internal lottery process") is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as "internal winning combination") is performed. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and the combination of symbols (display combination) related to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the combination of the symbols. In this way, when the combination of symbols related to the establishment of the prize is displayed, the privilege is given to the player, so that the movable character has a dynamic movement as an effect to give expectations to the result of the internal lottery process. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-042693).

(Third issue)
However, in a gaming machine in which a movable accessory is operated, for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-042693, the movable accessory should be stopped at an appropriate position so as not to be displaced. Is required.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned third problem, and an object of the present invention is to reliably stop a projection surface on which image light projected from a projection means is projected at an appropriate position.

In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides the 13-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[13-1 gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A movable member that can be driven in a predetermined manner (for example, a prism screen 710) and
A drive mechanism capable of driving the movable member (for example, a drive mechanism 815) and
Drive data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge board 86) for storing a plurality of drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20) having different drive modes for driving the movable member, and
A drive mode determining means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes screen accessory sequence processing) that drives the movable member and determines one of the plurality of drive data.
A drive control means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes a screen accessory control task) capable of executing control of the drive mechanism based on the drive data determined by the drive mode determining means.
A locking mechanism (for example, a gear shape portion 744, a stopper mechanism 790) capable of locking the movable member whose drive has been stopped, and
A plurality of unlocking data (for example, solenoid sequence tables ST01 to ST20) corresponding to the plurality of driving data for releasing the locked state of the locking mechanism and enabling the driving mechanism to be driven are stored. With the unlocking data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge board 86),
When the drive mechanism is controlled based on any of the plurality of drive data, the lock control that can execute the control of the lock mechanism based on the lock release data corresponding to the drive data. Means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes a screen accessory control task) and
Equipped with
The plurality of unlocking data are
The data is characterized in that the movable member is stopped by the control of the drive mechanism based on the drive data, and then the movable member is locked.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the movable member (for example, the prism screen 710) is driven by the drive mechanism (for example, the drive mechanism 815), stopped, and then the locking mechanism (for example, the gear). It is locked by the shape portion 744 and the stopper mechanism 790). Therefore, the movable member can be reliably locked while the movable member is stopped.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further provided with a projection means (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light toward a predetermined projection area (for example, the origin position of the projection surface).
The movable member (for example, a prism screen 710) is
The movable member is stopped by controlling the drive mechanism (for example, drive mechanism 815) based on the drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20) while having a projection surface (for example, projection surface 7123, 7141, 7167). Then, the projection plane is configured to be stopped in the predetermined projection region (for example, the origin position of the projection plane).

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the movable member (for example, the prism screen 710) is stopped, the projection plane is stopped in a predetermined projection region (for example, the projection plane origin position), so that the projection plane is stopped. The movable member can be securely locked in a state of being stopped in a predetermined projection area, and it is possible to prevent misalignment and the like.

In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides the 13-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[13-2 gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A movable member that can be driven in a predetermined manner (for example, a prism screen 710) and
A drive mechanism capable of driving the movable member (for example, a drive mechanism 815) and
Drive data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge board 86) for storing a plurality of drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20) having different drive modes for driving the movable member, and
A drive mode determining means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes screen accessory sequence processing) that drives the movable member and determines one of the plurality of drive data.
A drive control means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes a screen accessory control task) capable of executing control of the drive mechanism based on the drive data determined by the drive mode determining means.
A locking mechanism (gear shape portion 744, stopper mechanism 790) capable of locking the movable member whose drive has been stopped, and
A plurality of unlocking data (for example, solenoid sequence tables ST01 to ST20) corresponding to the plurality of driving data for releasing the locked state of the locking mechanism and enabling the driving mechanism to be driven are stored. With the unlocking data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge board 86),
Equipped with
The locking mechanism is
A groove forming member (for example, a gear shape portion 744) having a groove portion provided to be driven together with the movable member, and a groove forming member (for example, a gear shape portion 744).
An engaging member (for example, a stopper pin 7944) that can engage with the groove when actuated with respect to the groove.
The movable member is stopped by the control of the drive control means, and the groove portion and the engaging member are configured to face each other in a positional relationship.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the groove portion (for example, the columnar screen 710) is stopped by the control by the drive control means (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory control task). For example, the groove 7444) and the engaging member (for example, the stopper pin 7944) are in a positional relationship facing each other. Therefore, the groove portion and the engaging member can be reliably engaged with each other while the movable member is stopped by the control by the drive control means, and the movable member can be reliably locked.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The plurality of unlocking data (for example, solenoid sequence tables ST01 to ST20) are collected.
After the movable member (for example, the prism screen 710) is stopped by the control of the drive mechanism (for example, the drive mechanism 815) based on the drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20), the movable member is engaged. It is characterized by being data to be stopped.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the movable member (for example, the prism screen 710) is stopped by the control of the drive mechanism (for example, the drive mechanism 815) based on the drive data (for example, the motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20). After that, since the driving member is locked, the movable member can be reliably locked.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Further provided with a projection means (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light toward a predetermined projection area (for example, the origin position of the projection surface).
The movable member (for example, a prism screen 710) is
The movable member is stopped by controlling the drive mechanism (for example, drive mechanism 815) based on the drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20) while having a projection surface (for example, projection surface 7123, 7141, 7167). Then, the projection plane is configured to be stopped in the predetermined projection region (for example, the origin position of the projection plane).

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the movable member (for example, the prism screen 710) is stopped, the projection plane is stopped in a predetermined projection region (for example, the projection plane origin position), so that the projection plane The movable member can be securely locked in a state of being stopped in a predetermined projection area, and it is possible to prevent misalignment and the like.

In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides the thirteenth-third gaming machine having the following configuration.

[13-3 gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A movable member that can be driven in a predetermined manner (for example, a prism screen 710) and
A drive mechanism capable of driving the movable member (for example, a drive mechanism 815) and
A position detecting means (for example, an optical sensor 802,804,806) capable of detecting the position of the movable member, and
A position detection member (for example, a light-shielding piece 791) that operates with the drive of the movable member and is detected by the position detection means.
Drive data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge board 86) for storing a plurality of drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20) having different drive modes for driving the movable member, and
A drive mode determining means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes screen accessory sequence processing) that drives the movable member and determines one of the plurality of drive data.
With a drive control means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes a screen accessory control task) that can control the drive mechanism based on the drive data determined by the drive mode determining means and the detection result by the position detection means. ,
A locking mechanism (gear shape portion 744, stopper mechanism 790) capable of locking the movable member whose drive has been stopped, and
A plurality of unlocking data (for example, solenoid sequence tables ST01 to ST20) corresponding to the plurality of driving data for releasing the locked state of the locking mechanism and enabling the driving mechanism to be driven are stored. With the unlocking data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge board 86),
When the drive mechanism is controlled based on any of the plurality of drive data, the lock control that can execute the control of the lock mechanism based on the lock release data corresponding to the drive data. Means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes a screen accessory control task) and
Equipped with
The plurality of unlocking data are
Data that locks the movable member after the movable member is stopped by the control of the drive mechanism based on the drive data.
The drive control means is
The movable member is continuously driven until the position detection member is detected by the position detection means, and the movable member is stopped at a predetermined position based on the detection of the position detection member. By controlling the drive mechanism,
Moreover,
When the movable member is being driven and the position detection member is not detected by the position detection means for a certain period of time or longer, an abnormality processing means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that performs error processing) for processing when an abnormality occurs is provided. It is characterized by.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the drive control means (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory control task) is the position detection member (for example, the optical sensor 802,804,806) by the position detection means (for example, the optical sensor 802,804,806). For example, the movable member (for example, the pillar screen 710) is continuously driven until the light-shielding piece 791) is detected, and the drive mechanism (for example, the movable member is stopped based on the detection of the positioned detection member). For example, the drive mechanism 815) is controlled. Therefore, regardless of the position of the movable member before driving, the movable member is stopped based on the detection of the position-detected member. Therefore, the movable member is defined regardless of the position before the movable member. It can be stopped at a position (eg, any of the projection planes 7123, 714, 7167 can be stopped at the projection plane origin position). Then, while the movable member is stopped at a predetermined position, the movable member can be reliably locked by the locking mechanism (for example, the gear shape portion 744, the stopper mechanism 790).

Further, in the abnormality handling means, while the movable member (for example, the prism screen 710) is being driven, the position detection member (for example, the light-shielding piece 791) is constant by the position detection means (for example, the optical sensor 802,804,806). If it is not detected for more than a certain period of time, processing is performed when an abnormality occurs. Therefore, the abnormality handling means can perform appropriate processing according to the occurrence of the abnormality.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1) above is further provided with a projection means (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light toward a predetermined projection region (for example, a projection plane origin position).
The movable member (for example, a prism screen 710) is
The movable member is stopped by controlling the drive mechanism (for example, drive mechanism 815) based on the drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20) while having a projection surface (for example, projection surface 7123, 7141, 7167). Then, the projection plane is configured to be stopped in the predetermined projection region (for example, the origin position of the projection plane).

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the movable member (for example, the prism screen 710) is stopped, the projection plane is stopped in a predetermined projection region (for example, the projection plane origin position), so that the projection plane is stopped. The movable member can be securely locked in a state of being stopped in a predetermined projection area, and it is possible to prevent misalignment and the like.

In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides the 13-4 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[13-4 gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A movable member that can be driven in a predetermined manner (for example, a prism screen 710) and
A drive mechanism capable of driving the movable member (for example, a drive mechanism 815) and
A position detecting means (for example, an optical sensor 802,804,806) capable of detecting the position of the movable member, and
A position detection member (for example, a light-shielding piece 791) that operates with the drive of the movable member and is detected by the position detection means.
Drive data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge board 86) for storing a plurality of drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20) having different drive modes for driving the movable member, and
A drive mode determining means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes screen accessory sequence processing) that drives the movable member and determines one of the plurality of drive data.
With a drive control means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes a screen accessory control task) that can control the drive mechanism based on the drive data determined by the drive mode determining means and the detection result by the position detection means. ,
A locking mechanism (gear shape portion 744, stopper mechanism 790) capable of locking the movable member whose drive has been stopped, and
A plurality of unlocking data (for example, solenoid sequence tables ST01 to ST20) corresponding to the plurality of driving data for releasing the locked state of the locking mechanism and enabling the driving mechanism to be driven are stored. With the unlocking data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge board 86),
When the drive mechanism is controlled based on any of the plurality of drive data, the lock control that can execute the control of the lock mechanism based on the lock release data corresponding to the drive data. Means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes a screen accessory control task) and
Equipped with
The drive control means is
It is characterized in that the drive mechanism is controlled so that the movable member is stopped at a specific stop position based on the detection of the position detection member by a specific position detection means based on the drive data. ..

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the drive control means (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory control task) has a specific stop pattern to be stopped based on the drive data (for example, the motor sequence table MT01). (For example, a pattern in which the projection surface 7123 stops at the origin position of the projection surface) is different from the stop pattern (for example, a pattern in which the projection surface 7141 stops at the origin position of the projection surface). Even if it is detected, the control of the drive mechanism (for example, the drive mechanism 815) is continued so that the drive of the movable member (for example, the pillar screen 710) is continued, and the position is placed by the position detecting means corresponding to the specific stop pattern. Based on the detection of the detection member, the drive mechanism is controlled so that the movable member is stopped in a specific stop pattern. Therefore, the movable member can be reliably stopped with a specific stop pattern. Then, in a state where the movable member is stopped in a specific stop pattern, the movable member can be reliably locked by the locking mechanism (for example, the gear shape portion 744, the stopper mechanism 790).

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
The plurality of unlocking data (for example, solenoid sequence tables ST01 to ST20) can be obtained from the plurality of unlocking data.
After the movable member (for example, the prism screen 710) is stopped by the control of the drive mechanism (for example, the drive mechanism 815) based on the drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20), the movable member is engaged. It is characterized by being data to be stopped.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the locking mechanism (for example, the gear shape) is in a state where the movable member is stopped in a specific stop pattern (for example, a pattern in which the projection surface 7123 stops at the origin position of the projection surface). It can be securely locked by the portion 744 and the stopper mechanism 790).

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Further provided with a projection means (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light toward a predetermined projection area (for example, the origin position of the projection surface).
The movable member (for example, a prism screen 710) is
The movable member has a plurality of projection planes (for example, projection planes 7123, 714, 7167) and is controlled by the drive mechanism (for example, drive mechanism 815) based on the drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20). Is configured to stop in the predetermined projection area on any of the plurality of projection planes.
The plurality of unlocking data (for example, solenoid sequence tables ST01 to ST20) are collected.
Data for locking the movable member after the projection plane is stopped in the predetermined projection region, regardless of which of the plurality of projection planes is the projection plane stopped in the predetermined projection region. It is characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when the movable member (for example, the pillar screen 710) has a plurality of projection planes (for example, the projection plane 7123, the projection plane 7141, and the projection plane 7167), a predetermined projection region. Regardless of which projection plane is the projection plane stopped at (for example, the projection plane origin position), the locking mechanism (for example, the gear shape portion 744) is in a state where the projection plane is stopped in a predetermined projection region. , The stopper mechanism 790) makes it possible to securely lock the movable member and prevent misalignment.

According to the thirteenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of stopping a movable accessory at an appropriate position.

[14th game machine]
Conventionally, a game called a pachislot machine equipped with a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols on each surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "start operation") after the game medium such as medals and coins has been inserted into the game machine, and all reels are rotated. Outputs a signal requesting a start. The stop switch detects that the stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation"), and outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of the corresponding reel. do. The stepping motor transfers its driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

In this type of gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as "internal lottery process") is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as "internal winning combination") is performed. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and the combination of symbols (display combination) related to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the combination of the symbols.

Further, in a gaming machine called a pachislot machine, for example, a lock effect is performed as one of the effects that a player expects that the result of the internal lottery process is a special result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-). See 005025). In this lock effect, an invalidation period for invalidating various operations such as a start switch and a stop switch is set. After such an invalidation period ends, it is controlled to a normal gaming state or a more advantageous gaming state.

(Fourth issue)
By the way, in a gaming machine in which the above-mentioned lock effect is performed as one of the effects that make the player expect the result of the internal lottery process to be a special result, the game state after the lock effect is completed is the lock effect. If you can detect it inside, it may reduce your interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned fourth problem, and an object of the present invention is to make it difficult to detect the game state after the lock effect is completed during the lock effect, and to suppress a decrease in interest. ..

In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides a fourteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[14th gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
It is a gaming machine that can execute a game in any of a plurality of gaming states having different advantages and can advance the game by the operation of the player.
A variable display device (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) having a plurality of symbol sequences with symbols in the circumferential direction, and
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of symbol rows, and
A display means (for example, a projector 213, a projector substrate) capable of displaying an effect image in a predetermined display area (for example, projecting video light and projecting it on a projection surface), and
A first control means (for example, a main control circuit 90) capable of executing control related to the execution of a game, and
A second control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 150) that can receive information from the first control means and execute control related to the effect based on the received information.
Equipped with
The first control means is
A fluctuation control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that controls fluctuations in the plurality of symbol rows, and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing control to stop the symbol sequence corresponding to the stop operation means that has been stopped based on the stop operation means.
An operation invalidation means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of generating an invalidation period (for example, a lock effect) for invalidating the operation of the player, and
An information transmitting means (for example, a first serial communication circuit 114) capable of transmitting information on the gaming state, information on the start of the invalidation period, and information on the end of the invalidation period, and
Have,
The second control means is
An information receiving means (for example, the sub-control circuit 150) capable of receiving the game state information, the invalidation period start information, and the invalidation period end information, and
At least when it is determined from the information on the gaming state that the gaming state is changed, the focus data of the effect image displayed in the predetermined display area (for example, data for setting the focus A to C) is used. A focus data output means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes a screen accessory control task) capable of outputting focus data according to the changed gaming state to the display means, and
Have,
The focal data output means is
Even if it is determined that the gaming state will be changed, during the invalidation period, the focus data will not be output according to the changed gaming state, and the invalidation period will end. It is characterized in that the focus data corresponding to the changed gaming state is output to the display means.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the focus data output means (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory control task) is during the invalidation period (for example, even if it is determined that the gaming state is changed). , During lock effect), the focus data according to the changed game state is not output, and the focus data according to the changed game state is displayed based on the end of the invalidation period. Output to means (for example, projector 213, projector board). Therefore, during the invalidation period, it is possible to make it difficult to detect whether or not to shift to a gaming state having a relatively high advantage. In particular, since the invalidation period often occurs when there is a high possibility that the game state is controlled to a relatively advantageous gaming state, the gaming state after the invalidation period ends is detected during the invalidation period. If it can be done, there is a risk that the interest will decline. In this respect, according to the present invention, it is difficult to detect the gaming state after the invalidation period ends until the invalidation period ends, so that it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

It should be noted that the output of the focus data according to the game state before the change may be continued until the focus data corresponding to the game state after the change is output to the display means (for example, the projector 213, the projector board). However, the focus data that is out of focus may be output to the display means.

Further, the information transmitting means (for example, the first serial communication circuit 114) may independently transmit information on the gaming state, information on the start of the invalidation period, and information on the end of the invalidation period, or two or more. Information may be sent together. For example, if the start information of the invalidation period and the end information of the invalidation period are transmitted separately, the focus data output means (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory control task) is invalidated. After receiving the start information of the period, the focus data can be output to the display means (for example, the projector 213, the projector board) based on the reception of the end information of the invalidation period. Further, when the invalidation period start information and the invalidation period end information are transmitted together (at the same time) (for example, when the invalidation period start information is transmitted, the invalidation period execution period information is transmitted together). In the case of), the focus data output means can output the focus data to the display means based on the elapse of the execution period of the invalidation period after receiving the start information of the invalidation period.

Further, the display means may be, for example, a liquid crystal display, a dot display, a segment display, or the like, in addition to a projection means capable of projecting an image on a projection surface by projecting image light. For example, in the case of a display means such as a liquid crystal display, a dot display, or a segment display, the image is blurred until the invalidation period ends, and a clear image is displayed based on the end of the invalidation period. Can be assumed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further provided with a movable member (eg, a prism screen 710) that can be driven in a predetermined manner,
The display means is
It is a projection means (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light toward a predetermined projection area (for example, the origin position of a projection surface).
The movable member is
It has a plurality of projection planes (for example, projection planes 7123, 714, 7167) corresponding to the gaming state, and can be driven so that any one of the plurality of projection planes is stopped in the predetermined projection region. ,
The second control means (for example, the sub control circuit 150) is
A drive control means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes a screen accessory control task) for driving the movable member so that the projection surface corresponding to the gaming state is stopped in the predetermined projection region among the plurality of projection surfaces. Has more,
The focus data output means (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory control task) is
When the projection surface corresponding to the gaming state is stopped in the predetermined projection area, the focus data corresponding to the projection surface stopped in the predetermined projection area is output to the projection means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the projection plane of any one of the plurality of projection planes (for example, projection planes 7123, 714, 7167) corresponding to the gaming state is a predetermined projection region (for example, the origin of the projection plane). When stopped at the position), the focus data corresponding to the projection plane stopped in the predetermined projection area is output. That is, since the focus data is output after one of the plurality of projection planes is stopped in the predetermined projection area, the gaming state is detected before the projection plane is stopped in the predetermined projection area. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
One projection plane and the other projection plane among the plurality of projection planes (for example, projection planes 7123, 714, 7167) are
The projection distance from the projection means (for example, the projector 213) to the one projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7123) and the projection distance from the projection means to the other projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7141). It is characterized by being configured differently.

According to the gaming machine of (3), the projection distance from the projection means (for example, the projector 213) to one projection plane (for example, the projection plane 7123) and the other projection plane (for example, the projection plane) from the projection means. Since the projection distance up to 7141) is different, it is possible to project images with variations with different appearances. However, if the projection distance from the projection means to one projection plane and the projection distance from the projection means to the other projection plane are different, the image may be blurred and unclear, and the interest may be reduced. In this respect, in the gaming machine of (3) above, even if the distance from the projection means (for example, the projector 213) is different for each projection surface, the focus of the image light is adjusted for each projection surface, which is interesting. The decrease can be suppressed.

According to the fourteenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is difficult to detect the gaming state after the lock effect is completed during the lock effect, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[15th gaming machine]
Conventionally, a game called a pachislot machine equipped with a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols on each surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "start operation") after the game medium such as medals and coins has been inserted into the game machine, and all reels are rotated. Outputs a signal requesting a start. The stop switch detects that the stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation"), and outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of the corresponding reel. do. The stepping motor transfers its driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

In this type of gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as "internal lottery process") is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as "internal winning combination") is performed. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and the combination of symbols (display combination) related to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the combination of the symbols. In this way, when the combination of symbols related to the establishment of the prize is displayed, the privilege is given to the player, so that the movable character has a dynamic movement as an effect to give expectations to the result of the internal lottery process. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-042693).

(Fifth issue)
However, in a gaming machine in which a movable accessory is operated, for example, as in Patent Document 1, it is required to smoothly stop the movable accessory at an appropriate position so as not to cause a displacement of the movable accessory.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly stopping a movable accessory at an appropriate position.

In order to solve the fifth problem, the present invention provides the 15-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[15th-1st gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A movable member that can be driven in a predetermined manner (for example, a prism screen 710) and
A drive mechanism capable of driving the movable member (for example, a drive mechanism 815) and
Drive data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge board 86) for storing a plurality of drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20) having different drive modes for driving the movable member, and
A drive mode determining means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes screen accessory sequence processing) that drives the movable member and determines one of the plurality of drive data.
A drive control means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes a screen accessory control task) capable of executing control of the drive mechanism based on the drive data determined by the drive mode determining means.
A stop request generating means for generating a stop request for stopping the drive of the drive mechanism based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a stop request generating means.
When the stop request is generated during the execution of the control of the drive mechanism based on the specific drive data (motor sequence table MT15) among the plurality of drive data and the drive data change condition is satisfied (for example, the loop counter is No. 1). , No3, No4), a data changing means (for example,) for changing the specific drive data to another drive data among the plurality of drive data based on the timing at which the stop request is generated. , Sub CPU 151) that executes screen operation cancellation processing, and
It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, control of the drive mechanism based on specific drive data (for example, motor sequence table MT15) among a plurality of drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT19) is being executed. Even so, when a stop request for stopping the drive of the drive mechanism (for example, the drive mechanism 815) is generated and the drive data change condition is satisfied (for example, when the loop counter is any of No1, No3, and No4). The specific drive data is changed to other data based on the timing when the stop request is generated. As a result, the movable member can be reliably stopped without causing a positional deviation or the like.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
A projection means (projector) capable of projecting image light toward a predetermined projection area (for example, the origin position of the projection surface), and
A game state changing means (for example, main CPU 101) that can be changed to another game state having different advantages, and
Further prepare
The movable member (for example, a prism screen 710) is
It has a plurality of projection planes as projection planes that can be stopped in the predetermined projection region, and has a plurality of projection planes.
The drive data storage means (for example, the ROM cartridge substrate 86) is
Among the plurality of projection planes (for example, projection planes 7123, 714, 7167), the plurality of drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20) including the projection plane to be stopped are stored, and the data changing means (for example, the data changing means (for example). For example, the dedicated drive data (for example, the motor sequence table MT20) when the drive data is changed by the sub CPU 151) that executes the screen operation cancel process is also stored.
The drive mode determining means (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory sequence process) is
When the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means, it is determined in the drive data stored that the projection plane corresponding to the changed gaming state is stopped in the predetermined projection area.
The data changing means is
It is characterized in that the specific drive data (motor sequence table MT15) can be changed to the dedicated drive data among the plurality of drive data based on the timing at which the stop request is generated.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the drive data storage means (for example, the rom cartridge substrate 86) has a predetermined projection region (for example, projection) among a plurality of projection planes (for example, projection planes 7123, 7141, 7167). A plurality of drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT19) including a projection surface to be stopped at the surface origin position) are stored, and drive data is stored by data changing means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes screen operation cancel processing). Also stores dedicated drive data (eg, motor sequence table MT20) when is changed. Further, the data changing means changes the specific driving data to the dedicated driving data among the plurality of driving data based on the timing when the stop request is generated. This makes it possible to change to dedicated drive data (for example, motor sequence table MT20) only when the specific drive data cannot be used.

In order to solve the fifth problem, the present invention provides the 15-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[15-2 gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A movable member that can be driven in a predetermined manner (for example, a prism screen 710) and
A drive mechanism capable of driving the movable member (for example, a drive mechanism 815) and
Drive data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge board 86) for storing a plurality of drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20) having different drive modes for driving the movable member, and
A drive mode determining means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes screen accessory sequence processing) that drives the movable member and determines one of the plurality of drive data.
A drive control means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes a screen accessory control task) capable of executing control of the drive mechanism based on the drive data determined by the drive mode determining means.
A stop request generating means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes an effect content determination process) for generating a stop request for stopping the drive of the drive mechanism based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
Equipped with
The drive data storage means
After performing an operation effect of driving the movable member in a predetermined mode, a plurality of stop patterns (for example, a pattern in which the projection surface 7123 stops at the origin position of the projection surface, a projection surface 7141) are generated by driving the movable member. The first drive data (for example, the motor sequence table MT15) to be stopped by any one of the stop patterns (the pattern to stop and the pattern to stop the projection surface 7167), and
A second drive data (for example, a motor sequence table) that drives the movable member to stop at a specific stop pattern (for example, a pattern in which the projection surface 7123 stops at the origin position of the projection surface) among the plurality of stop patterns. MT01) and remember,
When the stop request is generated before the end of the operation effect while the control of the drive mechanism based on the first drive data is being executed, the first drive data is changed to the second drive data. Further, the data changing means for executing the control of the drive mechanism (for example, the sub CPU 151 for executing the screen operation canceling process) is further provided.

According to the gaming machine according to the above (1), the operation effect (for example, step number 1 of the motor sequence table MT15) is being executed while the control of the drive mechanism based on the first drive data (for example, the motor sequence table MT15) is being executed. When a stop request is generated before the end of step number 51), the drive mechanism (for example, drive mechanism 815) is driven by changing from the first drive data to the second drive data (for example, motor sequence table MT01). Perform control to make it. Therefore, when a stop request is generated during the execution of the above operation effect, the movable member is terminated in the middle of the operation effect and has a specific stop pattern (for example, a pattern in which the projection surface 7123 stops at the origin position of the projection surface). Since (for example, the prism screen 710) is stopped, it is possible to stop the movable member in a specific stop pattern while shortening the time.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
The plurality of drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20) can be obtained from the plurality of drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20).
Acceleration data for accelerating the movable member (for example, step numbers 1 to 6 of the motor sequence table MT01) and
Steady data (for example, step number 7 of the motor sequence table MT01) for steady driving after the movable member is accelerated, and
Deceleration data (for example, step numbers 8 to 12 of the motor sequence table MT01) for decelerating after the movable member is constantly driven, and
Holding data (for example, step number 13 of the motor sequence table MT01) for stopping the movable member for a certain period of time after the movable member is decelerated,
It is characterized by being composed of.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, after accelerating the movable member (for example, the prism screen 710), the movable member is constantly driven, then the movable member is decelerated, and then stopped for a certain period of time. You can control it. Therefore, it is possible to secure a period for constantly driving the movable member and a period for stopping the movable member, and it is possible to reliably execute control of the movable member based on the drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20). It will be possible.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
A position detecting means (for example, an optical sensor 802,804,806) capable of detecting a plurality of positions of the movable member, and
A position detection member (for example, a light-shielding piece 791) that operates with the drive of the movable member and is detected by the position detection means.
Further prepare
The drive control means is
Whether or not the position detection member is detected by the position detection means is determined during execution of control of the drive mechanism based on the drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20), and the position detection means. Based on the fact that the position detection member is detected at any position, the drive mechanism can be controlled so that the movable member stops in a stop pattern corresponding to the position detected by the position detection means. It is characterized by being composed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the drive control means (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory control task) is covered by the position detection means (for example, optical sensor 802, optical sensor 804, optical sensor 806). Whether or not the position detection member (for example, the light-shielding piece 791) is detected is determined during the control of the drive mechanism (for example, the drive mechanism 815) based on the drive data (for example, the motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20). , Based on the fact that the position detection member is detected at any position by the position detection means, the control of the drive mechanism is executed so that the movable member stops in the stop pattern corresponding to the position detected by the position detection means. To. Therefore, no matter what position the movable member (for example, the prism screen 710) is before driving, the movable member is stopped based on the detection of the positioned detection member, so that the position before the movement is reached. Regardless, the movable member can be stopped by any stop pattern (for example, any one of the projection planes 7123, 714, 7167 can be stopped at the projection plane origin position).

In order to solve the fifth problem, the present invention provides the fifteenth-third gaming machine having the following configuration.

[15-3 gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A movable member that can be driven in a predetermined manner (for example, a prism screen 710) and
A drive mechanism capable of driving the movable member (for example, a drive mechanism 815) and
Drive data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge board 86) for storing a plurality of drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20) having different drive modes for driving the movable member, and
A drive mode determining means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes screen accessory sequence processing) that drives the movable member and determines one of the plurality of drive data.
A position detecting means (for example, an optical sensor 802,804,806) capable of detecting a plurality of positions of the movable member, and
A position detection member (for example, a light-shielding piece 791) that operates with the drive of the movable member and is detected by the position detection means.
The drive mechanism is driven based on the drive data determined by the drive mode determining means, and the movable member is moved within a predetermined time after the position detection member detects any position of the position detection means. By stopping, the drive control means (for example, a screen accessory control task) capable of controlling the drive mechanism so that the movable member stops in a stop pattern corresponding to any position detected by the position detection means. Sub CPU 151) that executes
A stop request generating means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes an effect content determination process) for generating a stop request for stopping the drive of the drive mechanism based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
When the stop request is generated during the execution of the control of the drive mechanism based on the first drive data (for example, the motor sequence table MT15) among the plurality of drive data, the first drive data is used for the stop request. A data changing means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes a screen operation canceling process) that changes to other driving data according to the timing at which the data is generated and controls the driving mechanism.
Equipped with
The drive data storage means
The position detection member is detected at any position by the position detection means after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of driving the movable member after the operation effect of driving the movable member in a predetermined mode is performed. Then, the first drive data (for example, the motor sequence table MT15) for stopping the movable member with the stop pattern corresponding to the position detected by the position detecting means, and
When a certain time elapses from the start of driving the movable member and the position detection member is detected at a specific position by the position detection means, the position detection member is said to have a specific stop pattern corresponding to the specific position. The second drive data for stopping the movable member (for example, the motor sequence table MT01) and
When the position detection member is detected at the specific position by the position detection means when a time longer than the fixed time elapses from the start of driving the movable member, the position detection member is detected in the specific stop pattern. A third drive data for stopping the movable member (for example, the motor sequence table MT20) and
Remember,
The data changing means is
When the stop request is generated before the end of the operation effect, the normal data changing means (for example, a cancel check table) for changing from the first driving data to the second driving data and executing the control of the driving mechanism. In the case of No1 and No4, the sub CPU 151) that executes the processes of steps S67 and S69, and
When the stop request is generated after the end of the operation effect and within a specific time during which the movable member cannot be stopped by any of the stop patterns, the first drive data is changed to the third drive data. Then, the delay data changing means for executing the control of the drive mechanism (for example, the sub CPU 151 for executing the processes of steps S67 and S69 in the case of the cancellation check table No. 3) and
It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a stop request is generated during execution of control of a drive mechanism (for example, drive mechanism 815) based on the first drive data (for example, motor sequence table MT15), the first It is provided with data changing means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes a screen operation canceling process) that changes the driving data to other driving data according to the timing at which the stop request is generated to control the driving mechanism. When a stop request is generated before the end of the operation effect (for example, steps 1 to 51 of the motor sequence table MT15) to be driven in a predetermined mode, the data changing means has the first drive data to the second drive data. (For example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the processing of steps S67 and S69 in the case of the cancellation check tables No. 1 and No. 4) by changing to (for example, the motor sequence table MT01) and executing the control of the drive mechanism. .. Therefore, in the middle of the operation effect of driving the movable member in a predetermined mode based on the stop request, the control of the drive mechanism based on the first drive data is terminated, and the control of the drive mechanism based on the second drive data is performed. Can be changed.

Further, the data changing means (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen operation canceling process) is the first drive when the stop request is generated within a specific time during which the movable member cannot be stopped by any stop pattern. The processing of step S67 and step S69 is executed in the case of the delay data changing means (for example, in the case of the cancellation check table No. 3) in which the data is changed to the third drive data (for example, the motor sequence table MT20) and the control of the drive is executed. It has a sub CPU 151). According to this, even if the positioned detection member (light-shielding piece 791) should be detected by any of the position detection means when the control of the drive mechanism based on the first drive data is continued, the said The positioned detection member operates to a position exceeding the detection range of the position detection means. After that, the drive mechanism is controlled based on the third drive data. Therefore, even if the position detection member (light-shielding piece 791) may be detected by any of the position detection means when the control of the drive mechanism based on the first drive data is continued. For example, while suppressing the occurrence of positional deviation (stopping at a position deviated from the position to be stopped), the movable member can be reliably stopped by the stop pattern corresponding to the position detection means that detected the position detection member. ..

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
The plurality of drive data are
Acceleration data for accelerating the movable member (for example, step numbers 1 to 6 of the motor sequence table MT01) and
Steady data (for example, step number 7 of the motor sequence table MT01) for steady driving after the movable member is accelerated, and
Deceleration data (for example, step numbers 8 to 12 of the motor sequence table MT01) for decelerating after the movable member is constantly driven, and
Holding data (for example, step number 13 of the motor sequence table MT01) for stopping the movable member for a certain period of time after the movable member is decelerated,
It is characterized by being composed of.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, after accelerating the movable member (for example, the prism screen 710), the movable member is constantly driven, then the movable member is decelerated, and then stopped for a certain period of time. You can control it. Therefore, it is possible to secure a period for constantly driving the movable member and a period for stopping the movable member, and it is possible to reliably execute control of the movable member based on the drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20). It will be possible.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
The drive control means is
The drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20) is used to determine whether or not the position detection member (for example, the light-shielding piece 791) is detected by the position detection means (for example, optical sensors 802, 804, 806). ) Is performed during the execution of the control of the drive mechanism, and the stop corresponding to the position detected by the position detection means is performed based on the detection of the position detection member at any position by the position detection means. The drive mechanism can be controlled so that the movable member is stopped by a pattern (for example, a pattern in which the projection surface 7123 stops at the origin position of the projection surface, a pattern in which the projection surface 7141 stops, and a pattern in which the projection surface 7167 stops). It is characterized by being composed of.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the drive control means (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory control task) is covered by the position detection means (for example, optical sensor 802, optical sensor 804, optical sensor 806). Whether or not the position detection member (for example, the light-shielding piece 791) is detected is determined during execution of the drive mechanism (for example, drive mechanism 815) based on the drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20), and the position is determined. Based on the fact that the positioned detection member is detected at any position by the detection means, the control of the drive mechanism is executed so that the movable member stops in the stop pattern corresponding to the position detected by the position detection means. Therefore, no matter what position the movable member (for example, the prism screen 710) is before driving, the movable member is stopped based on the detection of the positioned detection member, so that the position before the movement is reached. Regardless, the movable member can be stopped by any stop pattern (for example, any one of the projection planes 7123, 714, 7167 can be stopped at the projection plane origin position).

In order to solve the fifth problem, the present invention provides the 15-4 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[15-4 gaming machines]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A movable member that can be driven in a predetermined manner (for example, a prism screen 710) and
A drive mechanism capable of driving the movable member (for example, a drive mechanism 815) and
Drive data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge board 86) for storing a plurality of drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20) having different drive modes for driving the movable member, and
A drive mode determining means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes screen accessory sequence processing) that drives the movable member and determines one of the plurality of drive data.
A drive control means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes a screen accessory control task) capable of executing control of the drive mechanism based on the drive data determined by the drive mode determining means.
A stop request generating means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes an effect content determination process) for generating a stop request for stopping the drive of the drive mechanism based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
When the stop request is generated during the execution of the control of the drive mechanism based on the specific drive data (for example, the motor sequence table MT15) among the plurality of drive data, and the drive data change condition is satisfied (for example, a loop counter). Is any of No1, No3, and No4), the data changing means for changing the specific drive data to another drive data among the plurality of drive data based on the timing at which the stop request is generated. (For example, in the case of the cancellation check tables No1, No3, No4, the sub CPU 151 that executes the processes of steps S67 and S69) and
Even if the stop request occurs during the execution of the control of the drive mechanism based on the specific drive data, if the drive data change condition is not satisfied, the specific drive data is maintained and the drive is performed. It is characterized by having a data maintenance means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes the processes of steps S67 and S69 in the case of the cancellation check table No. 2) that continues to control the mechanism.

According to the invention of (1) above, when a stop request is generated during execution of control of a drive mechanism based on specific drive data (for example, motor sequence table MT15) and a drive data change condition is satisfied (for example, a loop). Data changing means (for example, cancellation check tables No1 and No3) for changing the specific drive data to other data based on the timing at which the stop request is generated when the counter is any of No1, No3, and No4). , No4 has a sub CPU 151) that executes the processes of steps S67 and S69. However, even if a stop request is generated while the control of the drive mechanism (for example, the drive mechanism 815) based on the specific drive data (for example, the motor sequence table MT15) is executed, the drive data change condition is not satisfied. Maintains specific drive data and continues to control the drive mechanism. In this way, even if a stop request occurs, whether to continue the control based on the specific drive data or to change the specific drive data to another drive data depending on whether the drive data change condition is satisfied. Is determined, so that the movable member can be stopped more appropriately.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
The plurality of drive data are
Acceleration data for accelerating the movable member (for example, step numbers 1 to 6 of the motor sequence table MT01) and
Steady data (for example, step number 7 of the motor sequence table MT01) for steady driving after the movable member is accelerated, and
Deceleration data (for example, step numbers 8 to 12 of the motor sequence table MT01) for decelerating after the movable member is constantly driven, and
Holding data (for example, step number 13 of the motor sequence table MT01) for stopping the movable member for a certain period of time after the movable member is decelerated,
It is characterized by being composed of.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, after accelerating the movable member (for example, the prism screen 710), the movable member is constantly driven, then the movable member is decelerated, and then stopped for a certain period of time. You can control it. Therefore, it is possible to secure a period for constantly driving the movable member and a period for stopping the movable member, and it is possible to reliably execute control of the movable member based on the drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20). It will be possible.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
A position detecting means (for example, an optical sensor 802,804,806) capable of detecting a plurality of positions of the movable member, and
A position detection member (for example, a light-shielding piece 791) that operates with the drive of the movable member and is detected by the position detection means.
Further prepare
The drive control means is
Whether or not the position detection member is detected by the position detection means is determined during execution of control of the drive mechanism based on the drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20), and the position detection means. Based on the fact that the position detection member is detected at any position, the drive mechanism can be controlled so that the movable member stops in a stop pattern corresponding to the position detected by the position detection means. It is characterized by being composed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the drive control means (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory control task) is covered by the position detection means (for example, optical sensor 802, optical sensor 804, optical sensor 806). Whether or not the position detection member (for example, the light-shielding piece 791) is detected is determined during the control of the drive mechanism (for example, the drive mechanism 815) based on the drive data (for example, the motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20). , Based on the fact that the position detection member is detected at any position by the position detection means, the control of the drive mechanism is executed so that the movable member stops in the stop pattern corresponding to the position detected by the position detection means. To. Therefore, no matter what position the movable member (for example, the prism screen 710) is before driving, the movable member is stopped based on the detection of the positioned detection member, so that the position before the movement is reached. Regardless, the movable member can be stopped by any stop pattern (for example, any one of the projection planes 7123, 714, 7167 can be stopped at the projection plane origin position).

According to the fifteenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly stopping a movable accessory at an appropriate position.

71 Main control board 72 Sub control board 213 Projector 700 Movable screen unit 708 Fixed base 712 First screen member 714 Second screen member 716 Third screen member 722 Rotating shaft 732 Right base 742 Large diameter gear 744 Gear shape part 790 Stopper mechanism 791 Shading piece 815 Drive mechanism 911 Light guide plate 912R Right side lens Subunit 914L, 914R Inner surface wall 922 LED board 924A, 924B, 924C Light guide lens 928A, 928B, 928C Lens 937 Partition wall 970 Demarcated rib 7123,7141,7167 Projection surface 7144 Arm member 7145 Male rib 7164 Female rib 7326 Weight member

Claims (1)

A movable member that can be driven in a predetermined manner,
A drive mechanism capable of driving the movable member and
A drive data storage means for storing a plurality of drive data having different drive modes for driving the movable member, and a drive data storage means.
A driving mode determining means for determining one of the plurality of driving data for driving the movable member, and a driving mode determining means.
A drive control means capable of executing control of the drive mechanism based on the drive data determined by the drive mode determining means, and
A stop request generating means for generating a stop request for stopping the drive of the drive mechanism based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a stop request generating means.
When the stop request is generated during the execution of the control of the drive mechanism based on the specific drive data among the plurality of drive data and the drive data change condition is satisfied, the specific drive data is transmitted by the stop request. A data control means that can be changed to other drive data among the plurality of drive data based on the generated timing, and
Equipped with
The drive control means is
It is possible to execute control of the drive mechanism based on the drive data and stop the movable member in an appropriate stop pattern .
The data control means is
Even if the stop request occurs during the execution of the control of the drive mechanism based on the specific drive data, if the movable member can be stopped with the proper stop pattern , the movable member is not changed to other drive data. While the specific drive data can be maintained,
If the stop request occurs during the execution of control of the drive mechanism based on the specific drive data and the movable member cannot be stopped in the proper stop pattern , other drive data from the specific drive data. A gaming machine characterized in that the movable member can be stopped in the proper stop pattern .

Images